28236

Furuno 1732C Manual

3
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/252
Next page
MARINE RADAR
MODEL1722/1732/1742/1762
MODEL1722C/1732C/1742C/1762C
C
9-52, Ashihara-cho,
Nishinomiya, Japan
Telephone: 0798-65-2111
Telefax: 0798-65-4200
Your Local Agent/Dealer
All ri
g
hts reserved.
PUB. No. OME-34940
MODEL1722/C SERIES
(
DAMI
)
FIRST EDITION : APR. 2001
D : OCT. 11, 2001
Printed in Japan
i
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING
Do not disassemble or modify the
equipment.
Fire, electrical shock or serious injury can
result.
Immediately turn off the power at the
switchboard if the equipment is emitting
smoke or fire.
Continued use of the equipment can cause
fire or electrical shock. Contact a FURUNO
agent for service.
Keep heater away from equipment.
A heater can melt the equipment's power
cord, which can cause fire or electrical
shock.
Use the proper fuse.
Fuse rating is shown on the equipment.
Use of a wrong fuse can result in damage
to the equipment.
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
Do not open the equipment.
Only qualified personnel
should work inside the
equipment.
CAUTION
A warning label is attached to the equip-
ment. Do not remove the label. If the
label is missing or damaged, contact
a FURUNO agent or dealer about
replacement.
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, do not
remove cover. No user-serviceable
parts inside.
Name: Warning Label (1)
Type: 86-003-1011-0
Code No.: 100-236-230
WARNING
Radio Frequency
Radiation Hazard
The radar antenna emits electromagnetic
radio frequency (RF) energy which can be
harmful, particularly to your eyes. Never
look directly into the antenna aperture from
a close distance while the radar is in
operation or expose yourself to the trans-
mitting antenna at a close distance.
Distances at which RF radiation levels of
100 and 10 W/m
2
exist are given in the
table below.
Note: If the antenna unit is installed at a
close distance in front of the wheel house,
your administration may require halt of
transmission within a certain sector of
antenna revolution. This is possible - Ask
your FURUNO representative or dealer to
provide this feature.
MODEL
Distance to
100 W/m
2
point
Distance to
10 W/m
2
point
1722
Nil
Worst case
0.50 m
1732
1742
1762
0.20 m
Nil
Worst case
0.50 m
Nil
Worst case
1.00 m
Worst case
3.00 m
No one navigation device should ever be
solely replied upon for the navigation of
a vessel.
Always confirm position against all available
aids to navigation, for safety of vessel and
crew.
CAUTION
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS ........................................................................................ii
FOREWORD.......................................................................................................viii
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS...............................................................................x
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW.........................................................................1-1
1.1 Operating Controls ....................................................................................................1-2
1.1.1 Display unit controls........................................................................................ 1-2
1.1.2 Remote controller............................................................................................ 1-5
1.2 Inserting a Chart Card ............................................................................................... 1-6
1.3 Turning the Unit On/Off.............................................................................................. 1-7
1.4 Cursor Pad, Cursor.................................................................................................... 1-8
1.5 Display Brilliance, Panel Brilliance, Contrast, Hue ..................................................... 1-9
1.5.1 Display brilliance, panel brilliance.................................................................... 1-9
1.5.2 Contrast ........................................................................................................ 1-10
1.5.3 Hue (MODEL1722C series)........................................................................... 1-10
1.6 Selecting a Display.................................................................................................. 1-11
1.6.1 Display modes .............................................................................................. 1-11
1.6.2 Selecting a display ........................................................................................ 1-12
1.6.3 Switching control in combination and overlay screens................................... 1-13
1.6.4 Selecting radar source .................................................................................. 1-14
1.7 Data Boxes.............................................................................................................. 1-15
1.7.1 Showing, hiding data boxes with soft key ...................................................... 1-15
1.7.2 Rearranging data boxes................................................................................ 1-15
1.7.3 Temporarily erasing a data box ..................................................................... 1-15
1.8 Function Keys.......................................................................................................... 1-16
1.8.1 Executing a function...................................................................................... 1-16
1.9 Simulation Display................................................................................................... 1-17
2. RADAR OPERATION....................................................................................2-1
2.1 Radar Display............................................................................................................2-1
2.2 Transmitting, Stand-by...............................................................................................2-2
2.3 Tuning ....................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.4 Adjusting the Gain ..................................................................................................... 2-2
2.5 Reducing Sea Clutter................................................................................................. 2-4
2.5.1 How the A/C SEA works..................................................................................2-4
2.5.2 Adjusting A/C SEA .......................................................................................... 2-4
2.6 Reducing Precipitation Clutter ................................................................................... 2-5
2.6.1 Adjusting the A/C RAIN................................................................................... 2-5
2.6.2 Adjusting the FTC ........................................................................................... 2-6
2.7 Range Scale.............................................................................................................. 2-7
2.8 Pulselength................................................................................................................ 2-8
iii
2.9 Presentation Mode.....................................................................................................2-9
2.9.1 Selecting a presentation mode ........................................................................2-9
2.9.2 Description of presentation modes.................................................................2-10
2.10 Measuring the Range...............................................................................................2-12
2.10.1 Measuring range by range rings ....................................................................2-12
2.10.2 Measuring range by cursor............................................................................2-13
2.10.3 Measuring range by VRM..............................................................................2-14
2.10.4 Erasing a VRM, VRM indication.....................................................................2-15
2.10.5 Erasing EBL/VRM data boxes .......................................................................2-15
2.10.6 Hiding EBL/VRM data boxes .........................................................................2-15
2.10.7 Moving EBL/VRM data boxes........................................................................2-15
2.11 Measuring the Bearing.............................................................................................2-15
2.11.1 Measuring bearing by cursor .........................................................................2-15
2.11.2 Measuring bearing by EBL ............................................................................2-15
2.11.3 Erasing an EBL, EBL indication .....................................................................2-16
2.11.4 Erasing EBL/VRM data boxes .......................................................................2-16
2.11.5 Hiding EBL/VRM data boxes .........................................................................2-16
2.11.6 Moving EBL/VRM data boxes........................................................................2-16
2.12 Erasing the Heading Line, North Marker ..................................................................2-17
2.13 Reducing Noise........................................................................................................2-17
2.14 Reducing Radar Interference ...................................................................................2-18
2.15 Zoom .......................................................................................................................2-19
2.15.1 Zooming in on radar targets...........................................................................2-19
2.15.2 Zooming ARP, TTM targets............................................................................2-19
2.16 Shifting the Picture...................................................................................................2-20
2.16.1 Manual shift...................................................................................................2-20
2.16.2 Automatic shift...............................................................................................2-21
2.17 Using the Offset EBL................................................................................................2-22
2.17.1 Predicting a collision course ..........................................................................2-22
2.17.2 Measuring range & bearing between two targets...........................................2-23
2.18 Echo Trails...............................................................................................................2-24
2.18.1 Trail time........................................................................................................2-24
2.18.2 Starting echo trails.........................................................................................2-25
2.18.3 Trail brilliance (MODEL1722 series) ..............................................................2-25
2.18.4 Trail gradation (MODEL1722C series)...........................................................2-25
2.18.5 Trail color (MODEL1722C series)..................................................................2-26
2.19 Echo Stretch ............................................................................................................2-27
2.20 Echo Averaging........................................................................................................2-28
2.21 Outputting TLL Data.................................................................................................2-29
2.22 Guard Alarm.............................................................................................................2-30
2.22.1 Setting a guard alarm zone............................................................................2-30
2.22.2 When the alarm is violated….........................................................................2-31
2.22.3 Canceling the guard alarm.............................................................................2-31
2.23 Watchman................................................................................................................2-32
2.23.1 How watchman works....................................................................................2-32
2.23.2 Turning on/off watchman ...............................................................................2-32
2.23.3 Setting watchman stand-by interval ...............................................................2-32
2.24 Waypoint Marker......................................................................................................2-33
iv
2.25 ARP (option), TTM operation................................................................................... 2-34
2.25.1 Activating/deactivating ARP, TTM.................................................................. 2-35
2.25.2 Acquiring and tracking targets (ARP only)..................................................... 2-36
2.25.3 Displaying target number (internal, external ARP)......................................... 2-37
2.25.4 Terminating tracking of ARP targets .............................................................. 2-38
2.25.5 Setting vector attributes (ARP)...................................................................... 2-39
2.25.6 Displaying past position display (ARP).......................................................... 2-40
2.25.7 ARP, TTM target data.................................................................................... 2-41
2.25.8 CPA/TCPA alarm (ARP) ................................................................................ 2-42
2.25.9 Lost target alarm (ARP)................................................................................. 2-43
2.26 Interpreting the Radar Display ................................................................................. 2-44
2.26.1 General......................................................................................................... 2-44
2.26.2 False echoes................................................................................................. 2-46
2.26.3 SART (Search and Rescue Transponder) ..................................................... 2-48
2.26.4 Racon (Radar Beacon).................................................................................. 2-50
3. PLOTTER OPERATION ................................................................................3-1
3.1 Plotter Displays.......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Full-screen plotter display ...............................................................................3-1
3.1.2 Compass display............................................................................................. 3-3
3.1.3 Highway display..............................................................................................3-5
3.1.4 Nav data display.............................................................................................. 3-6
3.2 Presentation Mode ....................................................................................................3-7
3.2.1 North-up.......................................................................................................... 3-7
3.2.2 Course-up....................................................................................................... 3-8
3.2.3 Auto course-up................................................................................................ 3-8
3.3 Shifting the Display....................................................................................................3-9
3.4 Chart Scale................................................................................................................ 3-9
3.5 Chart Cards............................................................................................................. 3-10
3.5.1 Chart card overview ...................................................................................... 3-10
3.5.2 Indices and chart enlargement ...................................................................... 3-11
3.5.3 FURUNO and NavCharts™ .......................................................................... 3-12
3.5.4 C-MAP cards................................................................................................. 3-14
3.6 Working with Track .................................................................................................. 3-18
3.6.1 Displaying track............................................................................................. 3-18
3.6.2 Stopping, restarting plotting of own ship track ............................................... 3-19
3.6.3 Changing track color (MODEL1722C series)................................................. 3-20
3.6.4 Track plotting method and interval for own ship track.................................... 3-21
3.6.5 Changing own ship track/mark distribution setting......................................... 3-22
3.6.6 Erasing track................................................................................................. 3-23
3.7 Marks, Lines............................................................................................................ 3-25
3.7.1 Entering a mark............................................................................................. 3-25
3.7.2 Changing mark attributes .............................................................................. 3-25
3.7.3 Selecting line type......................................................................................... 3-26
3.7.4 Erasing marks, lines...................................................................................... 3-27
3.8 Waypoints................................................................................................................ 3-29
3.8.1 Entering waypoints........................................................................................ 3-29
3.8.2 Editing waypoint data.................................................................................... 3-32
v
3.8.3 Erasing waypoints .........................................................................................3-34
3.8.4 Changing waypoint mark size (FURUNO, NavCharts™) ...............................3-35
3.8.5 Searching waypoints......................................................................................3-36
3.9 Routes .....................................................................................................................3-37
3.9.1 Creating routes..............................................................................................3-37
3.9.2 Connecting routes .........................................................................................3-41
3.9.3 Inserting waypoints........................................................................................3-42
3.9.4 Removing waypoints from a route..................................................................3-44
3.9.5 Erasing routes ...............................................................................................3-44
3.10 Navigation................................................................................................................3-45
3.10.1 Navigating to a “quick point” ..........................................................................3-45
3.10.2 Navigating to waypoints.................................................................................3-46
3.10.3 Navigating to ports, port services (NavCharts™ only) ...................................3-47
3.10.4 Following a route ...........................................................................................3-49
3.11 Alarms .....................................................................................................................3-53
3.11.1 Audio alarm on/off .........................................................................................3-53
3.11.2 Arrival alarm ..................................................................................................3-54
3.11.3 Anchor watch alarm.......................................................................................3-55
3.11.4 XTE (Cross Track Error) alarm ......................................................................3-56
3.11.5 Speed alarm ..................................................................................................3-56
3.11.6 Proximity alarm..............................................................................................3-57
3.11.7 Trip alarm ......................................................................................................3-58
3.11.8 Alarm information ..........................................................................................3-59
3.12 Resetting Trip Distance............................................................................................3-60
3.13 Entering the MOB Mark, Setting MOB as Destination ..............................................3-61
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION...................................................................4-1
4.1 Principle of Operation.................................................................................................4-1
4.2 Sounder Displays.......................................................................................................4-2
4.2.1 Selecting a sounder display.............................................................................4-2
4.2.2 Description of sounder displays.......................................................................4-3
4.2.3 Selecting screen split method in combination displays.....................................4-7
4.3 Automatic Sounder Operation....................................................................................4-8
4.3.1 How the automatic sounder works...................................................................4-8
4.3.2 Types of automatic sounder modes .................................................................4-8
4.3.3 How to enable automatic sounder operation....................................................4-8
4.4 Manual Sounder Operation........................................................................................4-9
4.4.1 Selecting the manual mode .............................................................................4-9
4.4.2 Selecting display range....................................................................................4-9
4.4.3 Adjusting the gain............................................................................................4-9
4.4.4 Range shifting................................................................................................4-10
4.5 Measuring Depth, Time............................................................................................4-11
4.6 Reducing Interference..............................................................................................4-12
4.7 Reducing Low Level Noise.......................................................................................4-13
4.8 Erasing Weak Echoes..............................................................................................4-14
4.9 White Marker (MODEL1722C series).......................................................................4-15
vi
4.10
Picture Advance Speed............................................................................................4-16
4.10.1
Advancement independent of ship’s speed....................................................4-16
4.10.2
Advancement synchronized with ship’s speed ...............................................4-17
4.11
Display Colors (MODEL1722C series) .....................................................................4-18
4.12
Alarms......................................................................................................................4-19
4.12.1
Audio alarm on/off..........................................................................................4-19
4.12.2
Bottom alarm .................................................................................................4-20
4.12.3
Fish alarm......................................................................................................4-20
4.12.4
Fish alarm (B/L) .............................................................................................4-21
4.12.5
Water temperature alarm ...............................................................................4-22
4.12.6
When an alarm setting is violated... ...............................................................4-23
4.13
Water Temperature Graph........................................................................................4-24
4.14
Interpreting the Sounder Display ..............................................................................4-25
4.14.1
Zero line.........................................................................................................4-25
4.14.2
Bottom echo ..................................................................................................4-25
4.14.3
Fish school echoes........................................................................................4-26
4.14.4
Surface noise/Aeration...................................................................................4-26
5.
CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT.........................................................................5-1
5.1
General Setup........................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2
Radar Setup.............................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2.1
Radar display setup........................................................................................ 5-3
5.2.2
Radar range setup.......................................................................................... 5-6
5.2.3
Function key setup.......................................................................................... 5-7
5.3
Plotter Setup ............................................................................................................. 5-9
5.3.1
Navigation options .......................................................................................... 5-9
5.3.2
Function key setup.........................................................................................5-10
5.4
Chart Setup..............................................................................................................5-12
5.4.1
Chart offset....................................................................................................5-12
5.4.2
FURUNO, Nav-Charts
™
chart attributes .......................................................5-13
5.4.3
C-MAP chart attributes...................................................................................5-16
5.5
Data Boxes Setup ....................................................................................................5-20
5.6
Hot Page Setup........................................................................................................5-21
5.7
Navigator Setup .......................................................................................................5-23
5.7.1
Navigation data source ..................................................................................5-23
5.7.2
GPS receiver setup (Set equipped with GP-310B).........................................5-24
5.7.3
TD display setup............................................................................................5-26
5.8
Nav Data Display Setup ...........................................................................................5-28
5.9
Sounder Setup.........................................................................................................5-29
5.9.1
System setup.................................................................................................5-29
5.9.2
Sensor setup..................................................................................................5-31
5.9.3
Sounding range, zoom range, bottom lock range...........................................5-32
5.9.4
Function key setup.........................................................................................5-33
vii
6. DATA TRANSFER.........................................................................................6-1
6.1
Memory Card Operations...........................................................................................6-1
6.1.1
Formatting memory cards................................................................................6-1
6.1.2
Saving data to a memory card.........................................................................6-2
6.1.3
Playing back data from a memory card ...........................................................6-4
6.2
Uploading, Downloading Data ...................................................................................6-5
6.2.1
Setting communication software on the PC.....................................................6-5
6.2.2
Uploading or downloading data....................................................................... 6-5
6.3
Loading Waypoint Data from Yeoman........................................................................6-8
6.4
Receiving Data Via Network Equipment ....................................................................6-9
6.5
Outputting Data Through the Network......................................................................6-10
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING......................................................7-1
7.1
Preventive Maintenance ............................................................................................7-1
7.2
Replacement of Fuse................................................................................................. 7-2
7.3
Replacement of Battery .............................................................................................7-2
7.4
Simple Troubleshooting .............................................................................................7-3
7.4.1
General...........................................................................................................7-3
7.4.2
Radar..............................................................................................................7-4
7.4.3
Plotter..............................................................................................................7-5
7.4.4
Sounder ..........................................................................................................7-6
7.5
Diagnostics................................................................................................................7-7
7.5.1
Memory I/O test............................................................................................... 7-7
7.5.2
Test pattern ................................................................................................... 7-10
7.5.3
Keyboard, remote controller test.................................................................... 7-11
7.6
GPS Status Display ................................................................................................. 7-12
7.7
Clearing Memories................................................................................................... 7-13
7.8
Error Messages .......................................................................................................7-14
APPENDIX ......................................................................................................AP-1
Menu Overview............................................................................................................... AP-1
Geodetic Chart List....................................................................................................... AP-12
World Time Chart.......................................................................................................... AP-13
Icons............................................................................................................................. AP-14
SPECIFICATIONS...........................................................................................SP-1
INDEX............................................................................................................... IN-1
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
viii
FOREWORD
A Word to the Owner of the MODEL1722/1722C Series
Marine Radar
FURUNO Electric Company thanks you for purchasing the MODEL1722/1722C
Series Marine Radar. We are confident you will discover why the FURUNO
name has become synonymous with quality and reliability.
For over 50 years FURUNO Electric Company has enjoyed an enviable
reputation for quality and reliability throughout the world. This dedication to
excellence is furthered by our extensive global network of agents and dealers.
Your radar is designed and constructed to meet the rigorous demands of the
marine environment. However, no machine can perform its intended function
unless properly installed and maintained. Please carefully read and follow the
operation and maintenance procedures set forth in this manual.
We would appreciate feedback from you, the end-user, about whether we are
achieving our purposes.
Thank you for considering and purchasing FURUNO.
FOREWORD
ix
Features
The MODEL1722/1722C series work within our new product-network system
called the “NavNet.” Each product has an IP address to communicate with
NavNet compatible products within the network, using TCP/IP protocol through
an Ethernet 10 Base-T network.
The main features are
! Bright 7” screen visible even under direct sunlight.
! User friendly operation with combination of discrete keys, soft keys and
cursor pad.
! Accepts FURUNO and Nav-charts™ (NAVIONICS) or C-MAP charts.
! Fast chart redraw.
! Built-in NavNet interface circuit board.
! 12-channel GPS Receiver GP-310B with highly accurate position fixing
optionally available.
! User programmable function keys.
! Video sounder picture available with connection to optional network
sounder.
! ARP function (when connecting with MODEL1833/1833C series)
x
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
All NavNet products incorporate a “network circuit board” to integrate each
NavNet product on board through an optional LAN cable (Ethernet 10BASE-T).
Each NavNet product is assigned an IP address to enable transfer of images
between other NavNet products. For example, video plotter pictures can be
transferred to a radar and vice versa. Pictures received via the NavNet may be
adjusted at the receiving end.
A NavNet system may consist of up to four display units and one ETR. For a
system incorporating three or more products, a “hub” is required to process data.
Single unit NavNet system
Antenna Unit
(ex. MODEL 1722/1722C)
Network sounder
ETR-6/10N
Heading
sensor
External buzzer
PC
Echo sounder
E/S
Navigator
GPS receiver
GP-310B
12-24 VDC
Other NavNet unit
(GD-1700 etc.)
Rectifier*
PR-62
RU-3423
Ship's mains
100/110/220/230 VAC
1φ, 50/60 Hz
*PR-62: MODEL1722/1722C/1732/1732C
RU-3423: MODEL1742/1742C/1762/1762C
Display Unit
RDP-130 (monochrome)
RDP-131 (color)
Remote
Controller
RMC-100
Single-unit NavNet system
xi
Two-unit NavNet system
Antenna Unit
GP-310B
Radar data
Plotter data
Two-unit NavNet system
Three-or more unit NavNet system (Max. 4 NavNet capable display units)
Antenna Unit
GP-310B
HUB
Network sounder
ETR-6/10N
Sounder data
Radar data
Plotter data
Note: The picture disappears
10 seconds after the NavNet
cable is disconnected from a
"sub" NavNet display unit.
Three-or more unit NavNet system
1-1
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
This chapter provides basic information needed to get you started using your
radar. The follow topics are presented:
• Control overview
• Chart card insertion
• Power on/off
• Contrast, brilliance and hue (Color series only) adjustments
• Display selection
• Data boxes
• Function keys
• Simulation display
NOTICE
The brilliance of the LCD is adjustable
to match a wide variety of lighting
conditions. However, its maximum
setting may not be sufficiently bright
to permit viewing of the display with
polarized sunglasses.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-2
1.1 Operating Controls
1.1.1 Display unit controls
Overview of display unit controls
The radar systems are mainly operated with controls of the display unit (and
remote controller). Ten keys are labeled and they provide the function shown on
their labels. The five soft keys provide various functions according to current
operating mode. The [ENTER] knob mainly functions to register selections on
the menu and enter alphanumeric data. The cursor pad’s main function is to
move the cursor across the screen. Whenever you operate a key, a single beep
confirms operation. Invalid operation causes the unit to emit three beeps.
Cursor pad
Selects menu items and options;
shifts cursor. Press, release and
press again to change setting
consecutively.
Selects display mode.
Soft keys
Momentary press:
Registers own ship’s
position as a waypoint.
Press three seconds:
Marks man overboard
position.
Opens/closes the main menu.
Displays the soft keys for EBL/VRM.
Radar: Displays the soft keys for adjustment of
gain, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and FTC.
Sounder: Adjusts gain.
Long press: Turns power on/off.
Momentary press: Opens the
display for adjustment of brilliance,
etc. For radar, switches STBY and TX.
ENTER knob
Push: Registers options on menus.
Rotate: Selects character; adjusts sensitivity
(sounder, radar); chooses menu items and options.
Clears data; erases selected mark.
Opens/closes the alarm menu.
Shows or hides the soft
keys, function keys,
nav data alternately.
Chart slot
Selects a range.
Control panel
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-3
Soft keys
The five soft keys’ functions change according to the operation. Their labels for
their current functions are shown on the screen to the left of the keys. To hide or
show the soft keys, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key. Each press of the key shows
preset soft keys, user function keys or turns off navigation information (at the top
of the screen).
SOFT
KEYS
Display unit
Some soft keys show the current state of the soft key function in reverse video
as shown below.
.250/ 319.9
°
M
.125nm
SP
H-UP
SIGNAL
PROCESS
+
359.9
°
R
0.24nm
RETURN
E. AVG*
OFF
I. REJ
LOW
PULSE
SHORT
E. STR
LOW
Current option
shown in reverse
video
*: Only when MODEL 1833/C series are
used as radar source.
Plotter display
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-4
[ENTER] knob
The [ENTER] knob functions to
• Register data
• Enter alphanumeric data such as waypoint name
• Select menu items and options
• Adjust setting
Clockwise rotation of the knob selects an alphabet, symbol or numeric, in one of
the sequences shown below. After you have selected desired alphanumeric
character push the [ENTER] knob to register your selection.
[ENTER] knob
ENTER knob
Alphabet, symbol, numeric
A ! B ! C ! D ! E ! F ! G ! H ! I ! J ! K ! L ! M ! N ! O ! P ! Q !
R ! S ! T ! U ! V ! W ! X ! Y ! Z ! & ! _ ! ’ ! # ! 0 ! 1 ! 2 ! 3 !
4 ! 5 ! 6 ! 7 ! 8 ! 9
Numerics
0 ! 1 ! 2 ! 3 ! 4 ! 5 ! 6 ! 7 ! 8 ! 9
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-5
1.1.2 Remote controller
SAVE
RANGE
DISP
MOB
ABC
1
DEF
2
GHI
MNO
4
JKL
STU
7
VWX
65
98
YZ&
PQR
0
GAIN
’#
EBL / VRM
ENT
WPT
MARK
ENT
CNTL
CENTER
ALARM
SK3SK1 SK2
HIDE / SHOW
SK4 SK5
TX / STBY
BRILL
CLEAR
TONE
MENU
ACQ
3
Operating distance
90°: Up to 5 m
±45°: Up to 3 m
Replace the batteries (AA) when the
distance from which the display
unit can be operated shortens.
Note: The remote controller may
become damaged if dropped.
Mishandling of the remote
controller is not covered by
the warranty.
Remote controller
Key Function Key Function
RANGE Same as RANGE key on
display unit.
CLEAR Same as CLEAR key on
display unit.
DISP Same as DISP key on
display unit.
MENU Same as MENU key on
display unit.
SAVE MOB Same as SAVE MOB key on
display unit.
BRILL Adjusts display brilliance.
Ten keys Enter alphanumerics. TONE Adjusts display contrast.
EBL/VRM Same as EBL/VRM key on
display unit.
TX/STBY Toggles radar between
standby and transmit.
GAIN Same as GAIN key on
display unit.
ACQ Acquires radar target.
(Requires radar source
equipped with ARP.)
WPT Displays “alphabet” WPT list
on plotter display.
ALARM Same as ALARM key on the
display unit.
MARK ENT Same as MARK ENTRY soft
key.
HIDE/SHOW Same as HIDE/SHOW key
on display unit.
CENTER Returns own ship to screen
center on plotter display.
SK1 – SK5
(soft keys)
Same as soft keys on
display unit.
CNTL Switches control between
displays on combination
displays.
ENT
Same as ENTER knob on
display unit.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-6
1.2 Inserting a Chart Card
Your unit reads FURUNO and Nav-Charts™ (NAVIONICS), or C-MAP chart
cards, depending on its specifications. Insert the appropriate chart card for your
area as follows:
1. Open the chart card slot lid.
Chart slot
Display unit
2. Insert desired chart card groove side up.
3. Close the lid to protect the chart drive.
Note 1: Do not insert or remove the chart card while turning power on. This may
cause the equipment to freeze.
Note 2: Do not remove a card while the chart is being drawn. This may cause
the equipment to freeze.
Note 3: A card remover is supplied to ease removal of chart cards. Attach the
card remover to the right-hand side hole on the card and pull to remove
card. You can leave the card remover attached to the card while the
card is in the card slot - push the card remover leftward until it contacts
the recessed area in the card.
Note 4: For multiple display units, do not use the same chart card type in more
than one display unit.
Chart card and card remover
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-7
1.3 Turning the Unit On/Off
Press the [POWER/BRILL] key to turn the unit on. A beep sounds and the
equipment proceeds in the sequence shown below, displaying the product
information screen, startup test results and the chart usage disclaimer, in that
order. The startup test checks the ROM, RAM, internal battery and backup data
for proper operation, displaying the results for each as OK or NG (No Good). If
NG appears, an appropriate message appears on the screen. For any NG, try to
press any key to go to the chart disclaimer screen, then perform the diagnostic
test referring to the paragraph “7.6 Diagnostics.”
RADAR PLOTTER
STATION NAME:
RADAR
FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
CHARTS AVAILABLE
FLYBRDG = ANB01004
RADAR = ANB01003
STARTUP TEST
ROM OK
RAM OK
INTERNAL BATTERY OK
BACKUP DATA OK
NO NATIONAL HYDROGRAPHIC
OFFICE HAS VERIFIED THE
INFORMATION IN THIS
COASTLINE DATA CARD AND NONE
ACCEPT LIABILITY FOR THE
ACCURACY OF REPRODUCTION OR
ANY MODIFICATIONS MADE
THEREAFTER. THIS PRODUCT WITH
THIS COASTLINE DATA CARD
DOES NOT REPLACE THE
REQUIREMENT TO USE THE
APPROPRIATE PRODUCTS FOR
NAVIGATION ACCORDING TO
NATIONAL AND INTERNATIONAL
REGULATIONS.
Product information Startup test Chart disclaimer
PROGRAM No. 03591730**
Host Name
Chart List
** = Program version no.
(Two program version numbers.
One for NAVIO and one for C-MAP.)
The magnetron in the antenna unit takes about one minutes and thirty seconds
to warm up before the radar can be operated. The time remaining for warm up of
the magnetron appears at the center of the display, counting down from 1:30 to
0:01.
You may press any key at the chart disclaimer screen to show the last-used
display, or wait several seconds to let the equipment do it for you.
To turn the unit off, press and hold down the [POWER/BRILL] key until the
screen goes dark (approx. 3 sec.). To protect the LCD attach the hard cover.
Note that the network sounder will be turned off approx. three minutes after
turning off the power.
Note: You are asked if you want to start the simulation mode, which provides
simulated operation of the equipment, the first time you turn on the power
(or any time power is applied after a memory reset) the message shown
below is displayed. Push the [ENTER] knob to start the simulation mode,
or press the [CLEAR] key to start normal operation. For further details
about the simulation mode, see the paragraph “1.8 Simulation Display.”
START
SIMULATION MODE?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
TO SKIP.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-8
1.4 Cursor Pad, Cursor
The cursor pad mainly functions to shift the cursor, for measurement of range
and bearing to a location (radar) and latitude and longitude position (plotter).
Operate the cursor pad to shift the cursor. The cursor moves in the direction of
the arrow or diagonal pressed, on the cursor pad.
For the plotter display, the cursor can be turned off with the CENTER soft key.
This also returns own ship marker to the screen center.
34° 22. 3456'N 272.4°M TRIP NU
080° 22. 3456'E
15.9 nm 99.9 nm
GOTO
CURSOR
MODE
NTH UP
CENTER
MARK
ENTRY
+
Cursor data
L/L position,
Range and
bearing from
own ship to
cursor
Cursor
16.0nm
D. BOX
ON/ OFF
Cursor
Radar display
Plotter display
.250/ 319.9
°
M
.125nm
SP
H-UP
+
359.9
°
R
0.24nm
RADAR
DISPLY
NAV
FUNC
ZOOM &
D. BOX
SIGNAL
PROC
TARGET
Cursor, cursor data
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-9
1.5 Display Brilliance, Panel Brilliance, Contrast,
Hue
You can adjust display brilliance, panel brilliance, contrast and hue
(MODEL1722C series only) as shown below.
1.5.1 Display brilliance, panel brilliance
1. Press the [POWER/BRILL] key momentarily. A set of soft keys for
adjustment of brilliance, contrast and hue (MODEL1722C series only) appear.
The last-used adjustment window appears. In the example below the display
brilliance adjustment window is shown.
.250/ 319.9
°
M
.125nm
SP
H-UP
.250/ 319.9
°
M
.125nm
SP
H-UP
MODEL1722C series MODEL1722 series
PANEL
BRILL
CONTST
/HUE
RETURN
DISPLAY BRILLIANCE
8
PANEL
BRILL
CONTST
BRILL
CONTST
RETURN
DISPLAY BRILLIANCE
8
Current selection is higtlighted.
DISPLY
BRILL
DISPLY
BRILL
RADAR
STBY
RADAR
STBY
BRILL
CONTST
Brilliance adjustment soft keys
2. Press the DISPLY BRILL or PANEL BRILL soft key as appropriate. An
adjustment window appears at the bottom of the screen. This window shows
the name of the item selected for adjustment plus current brilliance level, by
bar graph.
DISPLAY BRILLIANCE
8
PANEL BRILLIANCE
8
Display brilliance Panel brilliance
Display brilliance and panel brilliance windows
3. Adjust the [ENTER] knob, clockwise to raise the setting or counterclockwise
to decrease it. You may also use the soft key pressed at step 2, in which
case the item selected is adjusted cyclically, from low to high. Eight levels of
display brilliance and panel brilliance are available.
4. Hit the RETURN soft key to finish.
The display brilliance can be adjusted by pressing the [POWER/BRILL] key.
If the unit is turned on with minimum display brilliance, press the
[POWER/BRILL] key consecutively to adjust the brilliance.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-10
1.5.2 Contrast
1. Press the [POWER/BRILL] key momentarily.
2. Press the CONTST (monochrome) or CONTST/HUE (color) soft key.
3. For MODEL1722C series, two soft keys appear at the pressing of the
CONTST/HUE soft key: CONTST and HUE. Press the CONTST soft key to
adjust the contrast.
CONTRAST
8
Contrast window
4. Adjust the [ENTER] knob, clockwise to raise the setting or counterclockwise
to decrease it. You may also use the CONTST soft key, in which case the
item selected is adjusted cyclically, from low to high. 16 levels (monochrome)
and 10 levels (color) of contrast are available.
5. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
1.5.3 Hue (MODEL1722C series)
1. Press the [POWER/BRILL] key momentary.
2. Press the CONTST/HUE soft key.
3. Press the HUE soft key to show the hue setting window.
HUE
▲
DAY
NIGHT
TWILIGHT
MANUAL SET
▼
Hue window
4. Operate the cursor pad or [ENTER] knob to select hue desired, referring to
the table below. MANUAL SET follows the color settings on the RADAR
DISPLAY SETUP for the radar, CHART DETAILS menu for the plotter and
SOUNDER MENU for the sounder.
Day Night Twilight Applicable mode
Characters Black Red Green Plotter, radar, sounder
Radar ring Green* Red Green* Radar
Radar echo Orange Red Yellow Radar
Background White Black Blue Plotter, radar
Landmass Yellow Light Yellow Dim Yellow Radar
*: Red on C-map
5. Hit the RETURN soft key to finish.
Note: When using the overlay screen, the own ship track will be hidden if the
radar background and own ship track are blue and the “MANUAL” hue
setting is used. In this case, set HUE to other position and then return to
“MANUAL” to show the own ship track in black.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-11
1.6 Selecting a Display
1.6.1 Display modes
If you have a navigator and network sounder connected, four full-screen displays
are available: radar, plotter, and video sounder and navigation data.
(MODEL1722C series have five screens, those mentioned above plus the
overlay screen.) In addition to the full-screen display, you can divide the screen
into half-screen combination displays to show two sets of images (data).
Full screen
(Ex. radar)
Combination screen
(Ex. radar + sounder)
Overlay screen
(Radar and plotter,
color model only.
Requires L/L data)
Display screens
The table below shows the displays available with each screen type.
Screen type and available display screen
Full screen Combination screen
options
Overlay screen options
(Color series only)
Radar, plotter, sounder,
nav data
Radar, plotter, echo
sounder, compass,
highway,
compass/highway, nav
data, overlay
Radar + plotter
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-12
1.6.2 Selecting a display
1. Press the [DISP] key to show the full-screen selection window. The icons of
modes not available are marked with “X” mark. PAGE1-PAGE5 are
user-arrangeable displays called “hot pages,” which you can configure as you
like. For further details, see “5.5 Hot Page Setup.”
PAGE1 PAGE2 PAGE3 PAGE4 PAGE5
RADAR PLOT SNDR NAV OVRLY
· TURN KNOB TO SELECT MODE
AND PUSH KNOB TO ENTER.
· PUSH ANY SOFT KEY TO
SELECT IMAGE SOURCE.
Basic display
screens
Hot pages
Full-screen selection window (“overlay” for color model)
2. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to select a basic display screen or a hot page
screen.
3. Push the [ENTER] knob. If you selected a basic display screen, a set of
combination display screens corresponding to the basic display screen that
was selected appear. In the example below, radar combination displays are
shown.
PUSH ENTER KNOB.
Radar combination screen selection window
4. Operate the [ENTER] knob to select the combination screen display desired
and push it to set.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-13
1.6.3 Switching control in combination and overlay screens
A soft key is provided in relevant combination and overlay screens (color series
only) to switch control between displays. In the example below, the RADAR
CNTRL and PLOTTR CNTRL soft keys enable switching control between the
radar and plotter screens in the plotter/radar combination display.
+
359.9
°
R
11.7nm
FISH
WP-002
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°
M
TRIP
NU
080° 22. 3456'E
19.9 kt 99.9 nm
MARK
ENTRY
MODE
NTH UP
NAV
POS
PLOTTR
CCNTRL
PLOTTR
CNTRL
CNTL
RADAR
RADAR
CNTRL
To adjust
plotter
To adjust
radar
Radar display selected Plotter display selected
16.0nm
12
3nm
LP
H-UP
+
359.9
°
R
11.7nm
FISH
WP-002
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°
M
TRIP
NU
080° 22. 3456'E
19.9 kt 99.9 nm
16.0nm
12
3nm
LP
H-UP
SIGNAL
PROC.
RADAR
CNTRL
RADAR
DISPLY
NAV
FUNC
TARGET
ST-BY
ST-BY
How to switch control between modes in the plotter/radar combination display
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-14
1.6.4 Selecting radar source
When other network radar is connected to the equipment, you may select an
image source as shown below. This is not necessary when no other network
radar is connected. Select one host name for the source though there are two or
three radar units on the net.
Note: Turn the power off whenever changing the source.
1. Press the [DISP] key.
2. Press any soft key to show the following display.
RADAR SOURCE
RADAR
- - -
SOUNDER SOURCE*
SOUNDER
-
IP ADDRESS
172.031.003.001
HOST NAME
RADAR
- - -
▲
SELECT
SOURCE
EDIT
RETURN
IF THERE IS MORE THAN
ONE NETWORK RADAR OR
ECHO SOUNDER, YOU MAY
SELECT THE IMAGE
SOURCES FOR DISPLAY.
*: Do not change this setting.
Select source menu
3. Use the cursor pad to select RADAR SOURCE and press the EDIT key.
RADAR SOURCE
RADAR
- - -
Radar source
Radar source and sounder source windows
4. Use the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob to enter source host name: ◄ or ► to
select position and rotate the [ENTER] knob to select character.
5. Press the [ENTER] soft key or [ENTER] knob.
6. Confirm that the correct host name is entered.
7. Press the [DISP] key to finish.
8. Turn the power off and on again.
Note: Sources names are determined at installation. For example, the source
names for radars in a two radar system might be “RADAR” and
“RADAR1”.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-15
1.7 Data Boxes
Data boxes, providing navigation data, may be shown on any full-screen display.
Up to six data boxes (two in case of large characters) may be shown, and the
default data boxes are position (in latitude and longitude), course over ground,
speed over ground, trip log and cursor position. The user may choose which
data to display, where to locate it, and show or hide it as desired. In addition,
data boxes may be set independently for each display mode (radar, plotter,
sounder). For how to select data for the data boxes, see paragraph “5.5 Data
Boxes Setup”.
.250/ 319.9
°
M
.125nm
SP
H-UP
Data boxes
MODE
NTH UP
NAV
POS
MARK
ENTRY
D.BOX
ON /OFF
TRIP LOG
177nm
POSITION
47
°
58.535'N
122
°
36.496'W
COG
323.6
°
M
SOG
20.0
kt
350.4
°
M
0.000 nm
Plotter display, showing data boxes
1.7.1 Showing, hiding data boxes with soft key
Radar: ZOOM & D. BOX
→
D. BOX ON/OFF (EBL/VRM data box, cursor data
box also shown/hidden)
Plotter: D. BOX ON/OFF
Sounder: AUTO/D. BOX
→
D. BOX ON/OFF
1.7.2 Rearranging data boxes
You may select the location for data boxes as follows:
1. Using the cursor pad, move the cursor to the data box you wish to move. As
the cursor enters the box it changes to a hand. Push the [ENTER] knob, and
the hand changes to a fist, meaning the box is correctly selected.
2. Use the cursor pad to drag the data box to the location desired and push the
[ENTER] knob.
1.7.3 Temporarily erasing a data box
You may temporarily erase a data box. Use the cursor pad to place the cursor
inside the data box you wish to erase and press the [CLEAR] key. To redisplay
the box, press the ZOOM & D.BOX soft key D.BOX soft key to display it.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-16
1.8 Function Keys
The function keys provide for one-touch call up of a desired function. The default
function key settings are as shown in the table below.
Default Setting, Key Label Function
Key
Radar Plotter Echosounder
#1 Heading line on/off,
HL
Track on/off, TRK TLL output, TLL
#2 Rings on/off, RNG Edit mark/line, EML Clutter, CLT
#3 Echo trail, TRL Ruler, RUL Signal level, SLV
#4 Offcenter, SFT Add new waypoint,
ADD
Noise limiter, NL
#5 Radar source, RSR Waypoint
alphanumeric list,
ALP
Picture advance, PA
1.8.1 Executing a function
1. Press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to replace the preset soft key labels with the
function key labels.
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°
M
TRIP
NU
080° 22. 3456'E
19.9 kt 99.9 nm
BRIDGE
FISH
002WP
Function
keys
T
R
K
E
M
L
R
U
L
A
D
D
A
L
p
Plotter
16.0nm
.250/ 319.9
°M
.125nm
SP
H-UP
Function
keys
TARGET
+
359.9°R
0.24nm
H
L
R
N
G
T
R
L
S
F
T
R
S
R
Radar
Function keys
2. Press function key desired.
Note: Function keys can be individually programmed for the radar, plotter and
sounder displays. For further details see the following:
Radar: paragraph 5.2.3
Plotter: paragraph 5.3.2
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-17
1.9 Simulation Display
The simulation display, for use by service technicians for demonstration
purposes, provides simulated operation to help acquaint you with the many
features your unit has to offer. It allows you to view and control a simulated
plotter, radar and sounder picture, without position-fixing equipment, network
radar or a network sounder. Most controls are operative, thus you may practice
setting destination, enter waypoints, measure range and bearing to a target, etc.
The simulation icon (
S
I
M
) appears when any simulation mode is active.
To start the simulation display;
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, SYSTEM SETUP and SIMULATION
SETUP soft keys in that order.
SIM
SETUP
EDIT
RETURN
RADAR
LIVE
PLOTTER
LIVE
SOUNDER
LIVE
SPEED
00.0kt
COURSE
000.0°
LATITUDE
45°35.000’N
LONGITUDE
123°00.000’W
START DATE & TIME
00:00 01.APR.01
RADAR SIMULATION DATA
NO
Simulation setup menu
2. Follow appropriate procedure shown below.
Radar
Internally generated echoes
1. Select RADAR, then press the EDIT soft key.
RADAR
▲
SIMULATION 1
SIMULATION 2
LIVE
▼
2. Select SIMULATION 1 and press the [ENTER] knob.
3. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-18
Antenna unit-generated echoes
1. Select RADAR SIMULATION DATA, then press the EDIT soft key.
2. Select YES and push the [ENTER] knob to erase simulation data and get
new data. The message “Now getting demo data. Do not turn off display
unit.” appears while the unit is receiving radar data.
Note: If the network radar could not be found “Radar source is not found.
Cannot get demo data.” appears. Wait one minute after the message
disappears. Actual time may be longer depending on the system
configuration. And if the radar is not active, the message “Radar is not
active. Cannot get demo data.” is displayed. Check that the radar is
plugged in and its signal cable is firmly fastened.
3. Select RADAR, then press the EDIT soft key.
4. Select SIMULATION 2, then press the [ENTER] knob.
5. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Plotter
1. Select PLOTTER, then press the EDIT soft key.
PLOTTER
▲
SIMULATION
LIVE
▼
2. Select SIMULATION, then press the [ENTER] knob.
3. Select SPEED and press the EDIT soft key.
4. Enter speed (setting range, 0-99 kt, default speed, 0 kt) with the
alphanumeric keys and push the [ENTER] knob.
5. Select COURSE and press the EDIT key.
6. Select “8 FIGURE” to trace the simulated ship’s track in a figure-eight course,
or enter your own course at DIRECTION. Use the trackball to select digit and
enter value with the alphanumeric keys.
7. Press the ENTER soft key.
8. Select LATITUDE and press the EDIT soft key.
9. Enter latitude (setting range, 85
°
N-85
°
S, default setting, 45
°
35.000’N) and
push the [ENTER] knob.
10. Select LONGITUDE and press the EDIT soft key.
11. Enter longitude (setting range, 180
°
E-180
°
W, default setting, 125
°
00.000’W)
and push the [ENTER] knob.
12. Select START DATE & TIME and push the EDIT soft key.
13. Enter start date and time and push the [ENTER] knob.
14. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-19
Sounder
1. Select SOUNDER, then press the EDIT soft key.
SOUNDER
▲
SIMULATION 1
SIMULATION 2
LIVE
▼
2. Select SIMULATION 1 (internally generated echoes) or SIMULATION 2
(network sounder-generated echoes), then press the [ENTER] knob.
Note 1: If the network sounder could not be found “Sounder source is not
found. Cannot get simulation data.” appears. And if the sounder is
not active, the message “Sounder is not active. Cannot get
simulation data.” is displayed. Check that the sounder is plugged in
and its signal cable is firmly fastened.
Note 2: The gain, shift, range and mode of the SIMULATION 1 mode picture
cannot be adjusted.
3. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2-1
2. RADAR OPERATION
This chapter covers radar operation, including the ARP (Automatic Plotter)
function. ARP requires connection of MODEL1833/1833C series network radar
equipped with the ARP circuit board.
2.1 Radar Display
Cursor
359.9°R
0.18nm
H-UP
. / 319.9
°M
.125nm
SP
TRAIL 30m
02m30s
G1 IN
G2 OUT
ES L
EAV L
IR L
.250
Range/
range ring
interval
Presentation
mode
Alarm icon
Battery icon
Zoom area
Zoom
window
Guard zone 1
Trail time
Trail elapsed time
Guard zone 1
Guard zone 2
Echo stretch
Echo averaging*
Interference rejector
Guard zone 2
VRM2
EBL1
VRM1
EBL2
Range ring
Pulselength
Heading
M: Magnetic
T: True
Heading line
EBL1 range
VRM1 range
Cursor range
and bearing
(Cursor position may
also be shown, in
L/L or Loran C TD.)
EBL2 bearing, VRM2 range
EBL1
27.0°R
VRM1
0 .158nm
EBL2
327.1°R
VRM2
0 .225nm
* = Radar source
Model 1833/1833C
series radar
Own ship vector*
(ARP-equipped model,
true vector mode)
North marker
Radar display
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-2
2.2 Transmitting, Stand-by
1. Turn the power on. The products information appears and is then followed by
the radar screen. You can display the radar screen at once by pressing the
any key.
2. Press the [POWER/BRILL] key momentarily.
3. Press the RADAR STBY soft key to highlight TX on its label.
4. When the radar picture is not required, but you want to keep it in a state of
readiness, press the [POWER/BRILL] key momentarily followed by RADAR
TX soft key.
5. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
2.3 Tuning
The radar receiver can be tuned automatically or manually, and the default
tuning method is automatic. To adjust manually or switch to automatic tuning, do
the following:
1. Press the [MENU] key to display the main menu.
2. Press the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.
3. Select TUNING and press the EDIT soft key.
AUTO
MAN
TUNING
Tuning bar
Tuning window
4. Choose MAN or AUTO as appropriate.
5. For manual tuning, adjust the [ENTER] knob until the tuning bar is at its
longest position.
6. Press the RETURN soft key.
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Note: If the auto setting does not provide satisfactory tuning, see the installation
manual for how to adjust tuning.
2.4 Adjusting the Gain
The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity of the radar receiver. It works in a manner
similar to the volume control of a broadcast receiver, which amplifies received
signals.
The proper setting is such that the background noise is just visible on the screen.
If your gain setting is too low, weak echoes may be missed. On the other hand
excessive gain yields too much background noise; strong targets may be missed
because of the poor contrast between desired echoes and the background noise
on the display.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-3
To adjust the receiver gain, transmit on long range, and then do the following:
1. Press the [GAIN] key. The last-used “adjustment window” is displayed. In the
example below, the gain sensitivity adjustment is shown.
.250/ 319.9
°
M
.125nm
SP
H-UP
GAIN
ADJUST
+
359.9
°
R
0.24nm
GAIN
A/C
SEA
A/C
RAIN
FTC
RETURN
GAIN SENSITIVITY
AUTO ROUGH
AUTO MODERATE
AUTO CALM
MAN
0
Item selected for adjustment is highlighted.
Gain adjustment soft keys
2. If the gain sensitivity window is not displayed, press the GAIN soft key to
show it.
GAIN SENSITIVITY
AUTO ROUGH
AUTO MODERATE
AUTO CALM
MAN
0
Gain sensitivity window
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select AUTO ROUGH, AUTO MODERATE, AUTO CALM,
or MAN (manual) as appropriate. Select an AUTO option according to the
sea state.
4. For manual adjustment, rotate the [ENTER] knob to adjust. The range of
adjustment is 0-100(%).
5. Press the [GAIN] key on the front panel or the RETURN soft key to finish.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-4
2.5 Reducing Sea Clutter
2.5.1 How the A/C SEA works
Echoes from waves can be troublesome, covering the central part of the display
with random signals known as “sea clutter”. The higher the waves and the higher
the antenna is above the water, the further the clutter will extend. Sea clutter
may affect radar performance because real targets are sometimes hidden by the
echoes of small waves. (See the left-hand figure in the figure below.) When sea
clutter masks the picture, adjust the A/C SEA to reduce the clutter.
The A/C SEA reduces the amplification of echoes at short ranges (where clutter
is the greatest) and progressively increases amplification as the range increases,
so amplification will be normal at those ranges where there is no sea clutter.
A/C SEA adjusted;
sea clutter suppressed
Sea clutter at
screen center
Effect of A/C SEA
2.5.2 Adjusting A/C SEA
A/C SEA should be adjusted so that the clutter is broken up into small dots, and
small targets become distinguishable.
1. Press the [GAIN] key.
2. Press the A/C SEA soft key to show the A/C SEA setting window.
A/C SEA
AUTO ROUGH
AUTO MODERATE
AUTO CALM
MAN
Model 1722/C series radar
A/C SEA
Model 1833/C series radar
0
0
A/C SEA setting window
3. When the radar source is the Model 1722/C series radar, press ▲ or ▼ to
select AUTO ROUGH, AUTO MODERATE, AUTO CALM, or MAN (manual)
as appropriate. Select an AUTO option according to sea state.
4. For manual adjustment, rotate the [ENTER] knob to adjust while observing
radar echoes. The range of adjustment is 0-100(%). Do not overadjust the
A/C SEA – weak target echoes may be missed.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-5
5. When the radar source is the Model 1833/C series radar, A/C SEA and
A/C RAIN can be automatically adjusted. Press the A/C AT soft key to select
ON or OFF as appropriate. When turned on, it overrides A/C SEA and A/C
RAIN settings.
6. Press the [GAIN] key on the front panel or RETURN soft key to finish.
2.6 Reducing Precipitation Clutter
The vertical beamwidth of the antenna is designed to see surface targets even
when the ship is rolling. However, by this design the unit will also detect rain
clutter (rain, snow, hail, etc.) in the same manner as normal targets. Precipitation
clutter shows as random dots on the screen.
2.6.1 Adjusting the A/C RAIN
When echoes from precipitation mask solid targets, adjust the A/C RAIN. This
split up these unwanted echoes into a speckled pattern, making recognition of
solid targets easier.
1. Press the [GAIN] key.
2. Press the A/C RAIN soft key to show the A/C RAIN window.
A/C RAIN
0
A/C RAIN setting window
3. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to adjust the A/C RAIN affect. The current level is
shown on the A/C RAIN level bar in the A/C RAIN window, and the range of
adjustment is 0 to 100(%). Do not overadjust the A/C RAIN – weak target
echoes may be missed.
4. Press the [GAIN] key on the front panel or RETURN soft key to finish.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-6
2.6.2 Adjusting the FTC
To suppress rain clutter from heavy storms or scattered rain clutter, adjust the
FTC. The FTC splits up these unwanted echoes into a speckled pattern, making
recognition of solid targets easier.
Note: In addition to reducing clutter, the FTC can be used in fine weather to
clarify the picture when navigating in confined waters. However, with the
circuit active the receiver is less sensitive. Therefore, turn off the FTC, by
setting it for “0”, when its function is not required.
FTC is available when the radar source is the MODEL1722 series radar.
1. Press the [GAIN] key.
2. Press the FTC soft key to show the FTC window.
FTC
0
FTC setting window
3. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to adjust. The range of adjustment is 0-100(%). Do
not overadjust the FTC – weak target echoes may be missed.
4. Press the [GAIN] key on the front panel or RETURN soft key to finish.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-7
2.7 Range Scale
The range setting determines the size of the area (in nautical miles) that will
appear on your display. in addition, the range setting will also automatically
adjust the range ring interval so that accurate range measurements may be
made while operating on any range setting.
The range, range ring interval and pulselength appear at the top left-hand corner
of the display.
Press the [RANGE (+ or -)] key to change the range scale.
Range scales (nm, sm)
Range 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 36 48 64
Ring
Interval
0.0625 0.125 0.125 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.5 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 12 12 16
No. of
Rings
2 2 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 4 4 4 3 4 4
Range scales (km)
Range 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 36 48 64
Ring
Interval
0.125 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.5 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 12 12 16
No. of
Rings
2 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 4 4 4 3 4 4
Note 1: Maximum range depends on the network radar as shown below.
Model 1722, 1722C: 24 nm
Model 1732, 1732C, 1742, 1742C, 1833, 1833C: 36 nm
Model 1762, 1762C, 1933, 1933C: 48 nm
Model 1943, 1943C: 64 nm
Note 2: You may choose which ranges to use from the RADAR RANGE SETUP
menu. For details see paragraph 5.2.2.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-8
2.8 Pulselength
The pulselength in use is displayed at the upper left corner of the display.
Appropriate pulselengths are preset to individual range scales. Therefore, you
are not usually required to select them. If you are not satisfied with the current
pulselength setting, however, it is possible to change it for the 1.5 and 3 nm (sm)
ranges (3 and 6 kilometer ranges) as below. Generally, select a longer pulse for
longer detection range and shorter pulse for better range discrimination.
1.5 nm, 1.5 sm, 3 km: Short pulse, medium pulse
3 nm, 3 sm, 6 km: Middle pulse, long pulse
1. Press HIDE/SHOW to show soft the radar soft keys.
2. Set the range to 1.5 or 3 nm, whichever you want to set.
3. Press the SIGNAL PROC. soft key.
1.5/ 319.9
°
M
.500nm
SP
H-UP
SIGNAL
PROCESS
+
359.9
°
R
1.40nm
RETURN
E. AVG
OFF
I. REJ
LOW
PULSE
SHORT
E. STR
LOW
Shown when radar
source is the Model
1833/C series
network radar. Not
shown otherwise.
Signal process soft keys
3. Press the PULSE soft key to select the pulselength setting. SHORT or
MEDIUM for 1.5 nm, 1.5 sm, 3 km and MEDIUM or LONG for 3 nm, 3 sm, 6
km.
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-9
2.9 Presentation Mode
This unit provides four radar presentation modes: head-up, course-up, north-up
and true motion.
Heading data is required for modes other than head-up. (When you use the
network radar, input the radar source.)
2.9.1 Selecting a presentation mode
1. Press HIDE/SHOW to show soft the radar soft keys.
2. Press the RADAR DISPLY soft key to show the RADAR DISPLAY soft keys.
.250/ 319.9
°
M
.125nm
SP
H-UP
RADAR
DISPLAY
+
359.9
°
R
0.24nm
SHIFT
HL
OFF
RETURN
MODE
HD UP
RINGS
ON /OFF
RADAR
DISPLAY
+
359.9
°
R
0.24nm
SHIFT
HL
OFF
RETURN
MODE
HD UP
RINGS
MED
MODEL1722C series MODEL1722 series
.250/ 319.9
°
M
.125nm
SP
H-UP
Current
mode
setting
Radar display soft keys
3. Press the MODE soft key. Each pressing of the key changes the presentation
mode and the presentation mode indication in the sequence of North-up,
True Motion, Head-up, and Course-up.
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
Note: When heading data is lost, the presentation mode automatically goes to
head-up, the heading indication at the screen top shows “- - -.-°” and the
audio alarm sounds. Press the [ALARM] key to acknowledge the alarm.
The message “HEADING DATA MISSING” appears. Restore compass
signal to show heading indication. Use the MODE soft key to select
presentation mode if necessary. The audio alarm may be silenced with the
[CLEAR] key.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-10
2.9.2 Description of presentation modes
Head-up (HU)
A display without azimuth stabilization in which the line connecting the center
with the top of the display indicates own ship’s heading. The targets are painted
at their measured distances and in their directions relative to own ship’s heading.
The short line on the bearing scale is the north marker.
Heading Line
North Marker
Head-up presentation mode
Course-up (CU)
The radar picture is stabilized and displayed with the currently selected course at
the top of the screen. As you change heading, the ship’s heading marker moves.
If you select a new course, the picture resets to display the new course at the
top of the display.
Heading Line
North Marker
Course-up presentation mode
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-11
North-up (NU)
In the north-up mode, targets are painted at their measured distances and in
their true (compass) directions from own ship. North is maintained at the top of
the screen. The heading line changes its direction according to the ship’s
heading.
Heading Line
North
North-up presentation mode
True motion (TM)
Fixed radar targets maintain a constant position on the screen, while your own
ship moves across the radar image at the correct speed and heading. A map-like
image is displayed, with all moving vessels traveling in true perspective to each
other and to fixed landmasses. As your ship’s position approaches the edge of
the screen, the radar display is automatically reset to reveal the area ahead of
your ship. You can manually reset your ship’s position at any time by pressing
the RADAR DISPLAY soft key followed by the SHIFT soft key.
Heading Line
North
True motion presentation mode
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-12
2.10 Measuring the Range
You can measure the range to a radar target three ways: by the range rings, by
the cursor, and by the VRM (Variable Range Marker).
2.10.1 Measuring range by range rings
Count the number of rings between the center of the display and the target.
Check the range ring interval and judge the distance of the echo from the inner
edge of the nearest ring.
To turn the range rings on, do the following:
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the RADAR DISPLY soft key.
.250/ 319.9
°
M
.125nm
SP
H-UP
RADAR
DISPLAY
+
359.9
°
R
0.24nm
SHIFT
HL
OFF
RETURN
MODE
HD UP
RINGS
ON /OFF
RADAR
DISPLAY
+
359.9
°
R
0.24nm
SHIFT
HL
OFF
RETURN
MODE
HD UP
RINGS
MED
MODEL1722C series MODEL1722 series
.250/ 319.9
°
M
.125nm
SP
H-UP
Radar display soft keys
3. Press the RINGS soft key to select ON (MODEL1722 series) or desired
brilliance (MODEL1722C series) among LOW, MED and HIGH.
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-13
2.10.2 Measuring range by cursor
Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor intersection on the inside edge of the
radar target. The range to the target, as well as the bearing, appears to the right
of “+” at the bottom of the display.
.250/ 319.9
°
M
.125nm
SP
H-UP
+
4.3
°
R
0.240nm
SIGNAL
PROC.
RADAR
DISPLY
NAV
FUNC
TARGET
ZOOM &
D. BOX
Cursor
Target
Bearing and range from own
ship to cursor position
How to measure range and bearing to a target with the cursor
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-14
2.10.3 Measuring range by VRM
1. Press the [EBL/VRM] key to display the EBL/VRM soft keys.
.250/ 319.9
°
M
.125nm
SP
H-UP
EBL
VRM
+
359.9°R
0.240nm
EBL1
ON
VRM1
ON
OFFSET
EBL2
ON
VRM2
ON
EBL/VRM soft keys
2. Press the VRM1 ON (dotted ring VRM) or VRM2 ON (dashed ring VRM) soft
key to select the desired VRM. The selected VRM’s indication, at the bottom
of the screen, is highlighted.
3. Rotate the [ENTER] knob the place the VRM on the inside edge of a radar
target. Read the VRM indication to find range to the target.
4. You may hide the EBL/VRM soft keys by pressing the [EBL/VRM] key.
.250/ 319.9
°
M
.125nm
SP
H-UP
VRM1
(Dotted line)
VRM2
(Dashed line)
VRM1 range
VRM2 range
Active marker is highlighted.
+
359.9°R
0.240nm
EBL
VRM
EBL1
ON
EBL1
---.-°R
VRM1
0.119nm
EBL2
---.-°R
VRM2
0.242nm
VRM1
ON
OFFSET
EBL2
ON
VRM2
ON
How to measure range with the VRM
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-15
2.10.4 Erasing a VRM, VRM indication
Press appropriate VRM soft key and press the [CLEAR] key. The VRM is erased,
and its indication becomes blank.
2.10.5 Erasing EBL/VRM data boxes
Press the EBL or VRM soft key associated with the EBL/VRM data box you wish
to erase. Press the [CLEAR] key once or twice to erase the data box.
2.10.6 Hiding EBL/VRM data boxes
Press the ZOOM & D. BOX and D. BOX ON/OFF soft keys to show or hide the
EBL/VRM data boxes.
2.10.7 Moving EBL/VRM data boxes
When an EBL/VRM data box is obscuring a target that you need to see, you can
move it to another location as shown below. This cannot be done when the
EBL/VRM soft keys are shown.
1. Press the [EBL/VRM] key to erase the EBL/VRM soft keys if shown.
2. Using the cursor pad, place the cursor inside the data box you wish to move.
As the cursor enters the box it changes to a “hand.” Push the [ENTER] knob,
and the hand changes to a fist, meaning the data box is correctly selected.
3. Use the cursor pad to drag the data box to the location desired and push the
[ENTER] knob.
2.11 Measuring the Bearing
There are two ways to measure the bearing to a target: by the cursor, and by the
EBL (Electronic bearing Line).
2.11.1 Measuring bearing by cursor
Use the cursor pad to locate the cursor to the center of the target The bearing to
the target appears in the range and bearing box at the bottom right-hand corner
on the screen, next to the “+” mark.
2.11.2 Measuring bearing by EBL
1. Press the [EBL/VRM] key.
2. Press the EBL1 ON (dotted line EBL) or EBL2 ON (dashed line EBL) soft key
to select the desired EBL. The selected EBL’s indication, at the bottom of the
screen, is highlighted.
3. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to bisect the radar target with the EBL. Read the
EBL indication to find the bearing to the target
4. You may hide the EBL/VRM soft keys by pressing the [EBL/VRM] key.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-16
.250/ 319.9
°
M
.125nm
SP
H-UP
EBL1
(Dotted line)
EBL2
(Dashed line)
EBL2 bearing
Active marker is highlighted.
+
359.9°R
0.24nm
EBL1 bearing
R: Relative
T: True
EBL
VRM
EBL1
330.1°R
VRM1
-.---nm
EBL2
234.1°R
VRM2
-.---nm
EBL1
ON
VRM1
ON
OFFSET
EBL2
ON
VRM2
ON
How to measure bearing with the EBL
Note: Bearing can be shown Relative to ship’s heading (relative) or in reference
to North (True). This setting may be changed by changing the EBL
REFERENCE setting, which is in the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu.
See the paragraph “5.2.1 Radar display setup.”
2.11.3 Erasing an EBL, EBL indication
Press appropriate EBL soft key and press the [CLEAR] key. The EBL is erased
and its indication becomes blank.
2.11.4 Erasing EBL/VRM data boxes
Press the EBL or VRM soft key associated with the EBL/VRM data box you wish
to erase. Press the [CLEAR] key once or twice to erase the data box.
2.11.5 Hiding EBL/VRM data boxes
Press the ZOOM & D. BOX and D. BOX ON/OFF soft keys to show or hide the
EBL/VRM data boxes.
2.11.6 Moving EBL/VRM data boxes
When an EBL/VRM data box is obscuring a target that you need to see, you can
move it to another location as shown below. This cannot be done when the
EBL/VRM soft keys are shown.
1. Press the [EBL/VRM] key to erase the EBL/VRM soft keys if appears.
2. Using the cursor pad, place the cursor inside the data box you wish to move.
As the cursor enters the box it changes to a “hand.” Push the [ENTER] knob,
and the hand changes to a fist, meaning the data box is correctly selected.
3. Use the cursor pad to drag the data box to the location desired and push the
[ENTER] knob.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-17
2.12 Erasing the Heading Line, North Marker
The heading line indicates the ship's heading in all presentation modes. The
heading line is a line from the own ship position to the outer edge of the radar
display area and appears at zero degrees on the bearing scale in head-up
mode; it changes its orientation depending on the ship orientation in north-up,
course-up and true motion modes.
The north marker appears as a short dashed line. In the head-up and course-up
modes the north marker moves around the bearing scale as the ship’s heading
moves.
To temporarily erase the heading line and north marker, press the RADAR
DISPLY soft key followed by the HL OFF soft key. Release the key to redisplay
the markers.
2.13 Reducing Noise
Noise, appearing on the displays as random “speckles,” can be reduced as
follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.
3. Select NOISE REJECTION and press the EDIT soft key.
4. Select OFF, HIGH or LOW as appropriate.
5. Press the ENTER soft key or the [ENTER] knob.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-18
2.14 Reducing Radar Interference
Radar interference may occur when near another shipborne radar that is
operating in the same frequency band as your radar. Its on-screen appearance
looks like many bright dots either scattered at random or in the form of dotted
lines extending from the center to the edge of the display. Interference effects
are distinguishable from normal echoes because they do not appear in the same
place on successive rotations of the scanner.
Be sure to turn off the interference rejection circuit when no interference exists –
weak targets may be missed.
Radar interference
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the SIGNAL PROC. soft key.
1.5/ 319.9
°
M
.500nm
SP
H-UP
SIGNAL
PROCESS
+
359.9
°
R
0.240nm
RETURN
E. AVG
OFF
I. REJ
LOW
PULSE
SHORT
E. STR
LOW
Shown when radar
source is the Model
1833/C series
network radar. Not
shown otherwise.
Signal process soft keys
3. Press the I. REJ soft key to choose the interference rejection level desired;
LOW, MED, HIGH or OFF.
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
The display shows IR L (Low), IR M (Medium) or IR H (High) when the
interference rejecter is on.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-19
2.15 Zoom
The zoom feature allows you to double the size of the area selected with the
zoom circle, which appears at the bottom right- or left-hand corner on the display.
The zoom feature is available on any range but is inoperative in true motion and
when the display is shifted.
2.15.1 Zooming in on radar targets
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the ZOOM & D. BOX soft key to show ZOOM & D. BOX soft keys.
3. Press the ZOOM ON/OFF soft key to select ON. A solid circle, called the
“zoom circle,” appears on the display.
4. Use the cursor pad to set the cursor where you want to zoom.
5. Press the CURSOR FLOAT soft key to fix the zoom cursor position. (The
solid circle changes to a dashed one.)
6. To release the cursor, press the CURSOR FLOAT soft key. (The dashed
circle changes to a solid one.) Relocate the zoom cursor, then press the
CURSOR LOCK key.
7. To quit the zoom function, press the ZOOM ON/OFF soft key to select OFF.
.250/ 319.9
°
M
.125nm
SP
H-UP
Zoom circle
Zoom window
+
001.0
°
R
0.160nm
ZOOM &
D. BOX
ARPA
TGT ZM
RETURN
ZOOM
ON /OFF
D. BOX
ON/OFF
CURSOR
FLOAT
Requires optional
ARP Board in
1833/1833C series
network radar.
Not shown when
radar source is
otherwise.
Zoom
2.15.2 Zooming ARP, TTM targets
You may zoom in on TTM targets coming into the display. TTM targets can come
from a NAVNET connected RADAR, or from other ARP RADAR that is
outputting the TTM message. Note: TTM stands for Tracked Target Message. It
is a NMEA 0183 data sentence that is an available output from some ARP
capable RADAR. TTM target numbers must be displayed to zoom in on tracked
targets. This can be done by enabling the target ID number option in the ARP
setup menu.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-20
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the ZOOM/D.BOX soft key to show ZOOM & D.BOX soft keys.
3. Press the ZOOM soft key to select ZOOM ON.
4. Press the ARP TGT ZM soft key.
SELECT TARGET NO.
▲
▼
1
Target no. selection window
5. Use the [ENTER] knob to select number (1-10) and then push the [ENTER]
knob. If the target does not exist several beep sounds and the zoom function
is cancelled.
To cancel, press the CURSOR LOCK soft key.
Note: The zoom window blends in with the background when the background
color for the radar picture is white. If the window is difficult to see change the
background color.
2.16 Shifting the Picture
Own ship position, or sweep origin, can be displaced manually or automatically
to expand the view field without switching to a larger scale.
2.16.1 Manual shift
The sweep origin can be shifted in any presentation mode to a point specified by
the cursor by up to 60% of the range in use in any direction.
1. Locate the cursor anywhere within the effective radius of the display.
2. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.
3. Press the RADAR DISPLY soft key.
4. Press the SHIFT soft key.
5. Press the MANUAL soft key to shift. The heading line shifts to the cursor
location. SHIFT appears at right-hand corner of the display.
6. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
7. To cancel shift, press the RADAR DISPLY, SHIFT and OFF soft keys in that
order.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-21
Cursor
Place cursor
where desired.
Press the MANUAL soft key.
SHIFT
Shifting the picture manually
2.16.2 Automatic shift
The amount of shift is automatically calculated with speed. The maximum shift
amount is limited to 60% of the range in use. For example, if you set the shift
speed setting for 15 knots and the ship is running at 10 knots, the amount of shift
will be 40%. The formula for determining shift amount is as shown below.
Ship's speed
Shift speed setting
X 0.6 = Amount of shift(%)
Automatic shift mode is only available in the head-up mode.
Setting automatic shift maximum speed
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the RADAR DISPLY soft key.
3. Press the SHIFT soft key to show the shift soft keys.
4. Press the AUTO S.SPD soft key to display the auto ship speed setting
window.
AUTO SHIP SPEED
15
Auto ship speed setting window
5. Adjust the cursor pad or [ENTER] knob to set the maximum speed of your
vessel and then push the [ENTER] knob or the ENTER soft key to set. The
setting range is 1-999 kt and the default setting is 15 kt.
Automatic shift
Press the AUTO key to automatically shift the sweep origin. To cancel shift,
press the RADAR DISPLAY, SHIFT and OFF soft keys.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-22
2.17 Using the Offset EBL
The offset EBL can be used to predict a potential collision course, and can also
be used to measure the range and bearing between two targets.
2.17.1 Predicting a collision course
The procedure below may be used to check if a radar target is on a collision
course with your vessel.
1. Press the [EBL/VRM] key to show the EBL/VRM soft keys.
2. Press the EBL1 ON soft key to turn on the EBL1.
3. Press the OFFSET soft key. The origin of EBL1 moves to the cursor position
and an “X” appears at the cursor position.
4. Use the cursor pad to place the cursor on the radar target which looks like it
might be on a collision course with own ship.
5. Push the [ENTER] knob to fix the origin position.
6. After waiting for a few minutes (at least three minutes), rotate the [ENTER]
knob so the EBL bisects the target at the new position. If the target tracks
along the EBL towards the center of the display (your ship’s position), the
target may be on a collision course.
7. To cancel the offset EBL, press the OFFSET soft key.
.250/ 319.9
°
M
.125nm
SP
H-UP
Initial target
position
Target tracked
here
+
359.9
°
R
.0.240nm
EBL
VRM
EBL1
ON
VRM1
ON
OFFSET
EBL2
ON
VRM2
ON
EBL1
45.0°R
VRM1
-.---nm
Predicting collision course with the offset EBL
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-23
2.17.2 Measuring range & bearing between two targets
The procedure which follows shows how to measure the range and bearing
between two targets, using the targets “A” and “B” in the figure below as an
example.
1. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on the target “A”.
2. Press the [EBL/VRM] key to show the EBL/VRM soft keys.
3. Press the EBL1 ON soft key to turn on the EBL1.
4. Press the OFFSET soft key. The origin of EBL1 and VRM1 moves to the
cursor position, which is marked with an “X.”
5. Rotate the [ENTER] knob so the EBL bisects the target “B”.
6. Press the [ENTER] knob.
7. Press the VRM1 ON soft key and then rotate the [ENTER] knob to place the
VRM1 on the inner edge of the target “B”.
8. Look at the indications for VRM1 and EBL1 to find the range and bearing
between the two targets.
9. To cancel the offset EBL, press the OFFSET key.
.250/ 319.9
°
M
.125nm
SP
H-UP
+
359.9°R
0.24nm
Target A
Target B
Bearing and range
between target A
and target B
EBL
VRM
EBL1
ON
VRM1
ON
OFFSET
EBL2
ON
VRM2
ON
EBL1
45.0°R
VRM1
0.125nm
Measuring range and bearing between two targets
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-24
2.18 Echo Trails
Echo trails are simulated afterglow of target echoes that represent their past
movements relative to own ship. This function is useful for alerting you past
possible collision situations.
Echo trail
Sample echo trails
2.18.1 Trail time
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the TARGET soft key.
3. Press the TRAIL soft key.
.250/ 319.9
°
M
.125nm
SP
H-UP
.250/ 319.9
°
M
.125nm
SP
H-UP
HIGH
MODEL1722C series MODEL1722 series
+
359.9
°
R
0.24nm
+
359.9
°
R
0.24nm
TRAIL
TRAIL
TIME
TRAIL
COLOR
RETURN
GRAD
SINGLE
TRAIL
TRAIL
TIME
RETURN
BRILL
HIGH
TRAIL
ON /OFF
TRAIL
ON /OFF
Trail soft keys
4. Press the TRAIL TIME soft key to show the trail time window.
TRAIL TIME
▲
15 seconds
30 seconds
1 minutes
3 minutes
6 minutes
15 minutes
30 minutes
CONTINUOUS
▼
Trail time window
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-25
5. Use the cursor pad to select time desired.
6. Press the ENTER soft key to finish.
2.18.2 Starting echo trails
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.
2. Press the TARGET and TRAIL soft keys.
3. Press the TRAIL ON/OFF to select ON.
4. Press the RETURN soft key twice to finish.
“TRAIL,” the echo trail time selected and elapsed time appear at the top
right-hand corner of the display. Then, afterglow starts extending from all targets.
Trails are restarted when the range or mode is changed, and zoom or shift is
turned on.
For continuous trails the maximum continuous trail time is 99 minutes and 59
seconds. When the elapsed time clock counts up to that time, the elapsed time
display resets to zero and trail begins again.
To turn off echo trail, press the TRAIL ON/OFF soft key to select OFF at step 3 n
the above procedure.
Note: No echo trails are shown where a tx sector blanking area is set.
2.18.3 Trail brilliance (MODEL1722 series)
Trail brilliance can be selected to high or low as below.
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.
2. Press the TARGET and TRAIL soft keys.
3. Press the BRILL soft key to select HIGH or LOW.
4. Press the RETURN soft key twice to finish.
2.18.4 Trail gradation (MODEL1722C series)
The echo trails can be shown in single or multiple gradations. Multiple gradation
paints the trails thinner with time, like the afterglow on an analog PPI radar.
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.
2. Press the TARGET and TRAIL soft keys.
3. Press the GRAD soft key to select SINGLE or MULTI as appropriate.
Multitone Monotone
Multitone and monotone trails
4. Press the RETURN soft key twice to finish.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-26
2.18.5 Trail color (MODEL1722C series)
The MODEL1722C series may be shown echo trails in blue, yellow, green or
white.
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.
2. Press the TARGET, TRAIL and TRAIL COLOR soft keys.
TRAIL COLOR
▲
BLUE
YELLOW
GREEN
WHITE
▼
Trail color window
3. Use the cursor pad to select the color desired.
4. Press the ENTER soft key.
5. Press the RETURN soft key twice to finish.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-27
2.19 Echo Stretch
Normally, the reflected echoes from long range targets appear on the display as
weaker and smaller blips even though they are compensated by the radar’s
internal circuitry. The echo stretch function magnifies these small blips in all
ranges. Two types of echo stretch are available: ES LOW which stretches
echoes in bearing direction and ES HIGH which stretches them in both range
and bearing directions.
"LOW" Echo stretch "HIGH" Echo stretch
Bearing
direction
Bearing
direction
Range
direction
Echo Stretch OFF
Target
Types of echo stretch
This function magnifies not only targets but also sea clutter and radar
interference. For this reason, be sure sea clutter and radar interference are
properly suppressed before activating the echo stretch.
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.
2. Press the SIGNAL PROC. soft key.
3. Press the E. STR soft key to select HIGH, LOW or OFF as appropriate.
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
The display shows ES H (High) or ES L (Low) when the echo stretch is on.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-28
2.20 Echo Averaging
The echo average feature, available with selection of a Model 1833/C series
network radar as radar source, effectively suppresses sea clutter. Echoes
received from stable targets such as ships appear on the screen at almost the
same position during every rotation of the antenna. On the other hand, unstable
echoes such as sea clutter appear at random positions.
To distinguish real target echoes from sea clutter, echo average performs
scan-to-scan correlation. Correlation is made by storing and averaging echo
signals over successive picture frames. If an echo is solid and stable, it is
presented in its normal intensity. Sea clutter is averaged over successive scans
resulting in the reduced brilliance, making it easier to discriminate real targets
from sea clutter.
To properly use the echo average function, it is recommended to first suppress
sea clutter with the A/C SEA control and then do the following:
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.
2. Press the SIGNAL PROC. soft key.
3. Press the E. AVG soft key to select desired echo averaging.
OFF: No averaging
LOW: Helps distinguish targets from sea clutter and suppresses brilliance
of unstable echoes.
MED: Distinguishes small stationary targets such as navigation buoys.
HIGH: Stably displays distant targets.
The display shows EAV L, EAV M or EAV H when echo averaging is on.
(a) Echo average OFF (b) Echo average ON
Effect of echo averaging
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-29
2.21 Outputting TLL Data
Target position data can be output to units of the network and shown on their
plotter screen, with the TTL mark (
X
). This function requires position and
heading data.
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.
2. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on the target whose position you
wish to output.
3. Press the TARGET soft key.
.250/ 319.9
°
M
.125nm
SP
H-UP
+
359.9
°
R
0.240nm
TARGET
TRAIL
TLL
OUTPUT
ACQ
TARGET
INFO
RETURN
Shown with selection of
1833/C series network
radar equipped with ARP
function as source.
Not shown otherwise.
TARGET soft keys
4. Press the TLL OUTPUT soft key to output target position data.
5. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
Note: The screen of the TLL recipient may be temporarily interrupted when
receiving TLL from another NavNet display unit. Press any key to restore
normal operation.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-30
2.22 Guard Alarm
The guard alarm allows the operator to set the desired range and bearing for a
guard zone. When ships, islands, landmasses, etc. violate the guard zone, an
audio alarm sounds and the offending target blinks to call the operator’s
attention.
CAUTION
• The alarm should not be relied upon as
the sole means for detecting possible
collision situations.
• A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and GAIN controls
should be properly adjusted to be sure
the alarm system does not overlook
target echoes.
2.22.1 Setting a guard alarm zone
To set a guard alarm zone, set the radar to transmit and do the following:
1. Press the [ALARM] key.
2. Use the cursor pad to set the cursor on the top left corner (or top right corner)
of the guard zone you want to set, then press the SET GUARD1 or SET
GUARD2 soft key, depending on which guard zone you want to set.
3. Use the cursor pad to set the cursor on the bottom right corner (or top left
corner) of the guard zone area and push the [ENTER] knob.
4. Press RETURN soft key to finish.
.250/ 319.9
°
M
.125nm
SP
H-UP
.250/ 319.9
°
M
.125nm
SP
H-UP
317.2
°
R
0.230nm
ALARM
39.9
°
R
.0.230nm
V
R
M
.125n
m
.032nm
E
B
L
19.9
T
NO ALARM
(1) Drag cursor to top (or bottom) corner
for guard zone and press the SET
GUARD1 or SET GUARD2 soft key.
(2) Drag cursor diagonally to bottom (or top)
corner for guard zone and press the [ENTER]
knob.
MOVE +CURSOR TO
ANOTHER CORNER OF
GUARD1 AND PUSH KNOB
TO SET.
ALARM
GUARD 1
SET
GUARD1
ERASE
GUARD1
SET
GUARD2
RETURN
+
+
SET
GUARD1
SET
GUARD2
RETURN
1
2
How to set a guard alarm zone
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-31
The equipment then searches for targets inside the guard zone to determine the
guard alarm type. If a target is found inside the guard zone the guard zone type
becomes an “Outward guard alarm”, and any target exiting, the guard zone will
trigger an alarm. If no target is found the guard zone type becomes an “Inward
guard alarm”, and any targets entering the guard zone will trigger the alarm. The
guard alarm type is shown as G1(G2) IN or G1(G2) OUT.
Note 1: When the radar range is less than the guard zone range, the audio
alarm sounds and the alarm icon is displayed (red on the color model).
Press the [CLEAR] key to silence the alarm. Press the [ALARM] key and
the message “GUARD1(2) IS OUTSIDE RADAR RANGE” appears.
Reselect appropriate range.
Note 2: If the network radar is set to standby while the guard alarm is active, the
guard alarm is cancelled. The guard alarm is redisplayed when the
radar is set to transmit again.
Note 3: If the network radar is set to standby while the radar picture is not
displayed, the alarm icon appears (red on the color model) and the
alarm sounds. Press the [ALARM] key and the message “STBY MODE
HAS BEEN SELECTED. GUARD/WTCHMN CANCELED.” or
“GUARD/WATCHMAN CANCELED. STBY/TX SELECTED.” appears.
2.22.2 When the alarm is violated…
Any radar target violating the guard zone will flash, the audio alarm sounds, and
the alarm icon appears (red on the color model). Additionally the message
“TARGET ENTERED INTO GUARD1(GUARD2)” or “TARGET LEFT FROM
GUARD1(GUARD2)” is displayed at the bottom of the screen, depending on the
guard zone type. Press the [CLEAR] key to silence the alarm. When this is done,
“G1(G2) ACK” replaces G1(G2) IN(OUT) at the top right corner of the display.
This means the alarm is temporarily deactivated. To reactivate the alarm, press
the SET GUARD1 or SET GUARD2 soft key as appropriate.
2.22.3 Canceling the guard alarm
1. Press the [ALARM] key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Press the ERASE GUARD1 or ERASE GUARD2 soft key as appropriate.
3. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-32
2.23 Watchman
2.23.1 How watchman works
The watchman function periodically transmits radar pulses for one minute to
check for targets in a guard zone. If a target is found in the zone, watchman is
cancelled, the audio alarm sounds and the radar continues transmitting. If no
target is found the radar goes into standby, for the number of minutes selected
on the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu. This feature is useful when you do not
need the radar’s function continuously but want to be alerted to radar targets in a
specific area. “WTCH” appears at the top left corner when Watchman is active.
ST-BY
5,10
or
20 min
Tx
1 min
Tx
1 min
Watchman
starts
5,10
or
20 min
ST-BY
*
*
* Beeps emitted just before radar transmits.
How watchman works
2.23.2 Turning on/off watchman
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.
2. Press the NAV FUNC soft key.
3. Press the W. MAN ON/OFF soft key to select ON or OFF as appropriate.
4. Press RETURN soft key to finish.
Note: When the watchman is activated and no guard zone is active, the
message “PLEASE SET GUARD ZONE. PRESS ANY KEY TO
CONTINUE.” appears. Press any key and then set a guard zone.
2.23.3 Setting watchman stand-by interval
The watchman standby period interval, that is, the number of minutes the radar
is in standby, can be set to 5, 10 or 20 minutes as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.
3. Select WATCHMAN TIME and press the EDIT soft key.
WATCHMAN TIME
5 minutes
10 minutes
20 minutes
Watchman window
4. Select time desired and press the ENTER soft key.
5. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-33
2.24 Waypoint Marker
A waypoint marker, showing waypoint position output from a navigation device,
may be inscribed on the radar display. You may show or hide this marker as
desired.
.250/ 319.9
°
M
.125nm
SP
H-UP
+
359.9°R
0.24nm
NAV
FUNC
RETURN
W. MAN
ON/OFF
WPT MK
ON /OFF
Waypoint
marker
+
Waypoint marker
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.
2. Press the NAV FUNC soft key.
3. Press the WPT MK ON/OFF soft key to select ON or OFF as appropriate.
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-34
2.25 ARP (option), TTM operation
When the radar source is ARP-equipped Model 1833/C series network radar,
you can manually and automatically acquire and track 10 targets. Once a target
is acquired automatically or manually it is automatically tracked within 0.1 to 32
nm. When the FURUNO heading sensor PG-1000 is connected, RMC sentence
(NMEA) is required for true heading data.
Alternatively, you can display the tracks of other ships by receiving the data
sentence “TTM” through the NETWORK or NMEA port. However, targets cannot
be acquired.
Usage precautions for ARP
WARNING
No one navigational aid should be relied
upon for the safety of vessel and crew.
The navigator has the responsibility to
check all aids available to confirm
position. Electronic aids are not
a substitute for basic navigational
principles and common sense.
• This auto plotter automatically tracks an
automatically or manually acquired radar
target and calculates its course and
speed, indicating them by a vector. Since
the data generated by the auto plotter
are based on what radar targets are
selected, the radar must always be
optimally tuned for use with the auto
plotter, to ensure required targets will not
be lost or unwanted targets such as sea
returns and noise will not be acquired
and tracked.
• A target does not always mean a land-
mass, reef, ships or other surface vessels
but can imply returns from sea surface
and clutter. As the level of clutter changes
with environment, the operator should
properly adjust the A/C SEA, A/C RAIN
and GAIN controls to be sure target
echoes are not eliminated from the
radar screen.
CAUTION
The plotting accuracy and response of
this auto plotter meets IMO standards.
Tracking accuracy is affected by the
following:
• Tracking accuracy is affected by course
change. One to two minutes is required to
restore vectors to full accuracy after an
abrupt course change. (The actual
amount depends on gyrocompass
specifications.)
• The amount of tracking delay is inversely
proportional to the relative speed of the
target. Delay is on the order of 15-30
seconds for high relative speed; 30-60
seconds for low relative speed.
Display accuracy is affected by the
following:
• Echo intensity
• Radar transmission pulsewidth
• Radar bearing error
• Gyrocompass error
• Course change (own ship or target)
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-35
2.25.1 Activating/deactivating ARP, TTM
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key to show the ARP
SETUP menu.
ARP TARGET INFO
INTERNAL ARP
CANCEL ALL TARGETS
NO
ARP VECTOR MODE
TRUE
ARP VECTOR TIME
30 minutes
HISTORY INTERVAL
OFF
CPA
OFF
TCPA
30 seconds
AUTO ACQUISITION AREA
OFF
TARGET ID NUMBER
OFF
ARP
SETUP
EDIT
RETURN
ARP setup menu
2. Select ARP TARGET INFO, and then press the EDIT soft key to show the
ARP target info window.
ARP TARGET INFO
▲
▼
INTERNAL ARP
EXTERNAL ARP
OFF
ARP target info window
3. Select INTERNAL ARP, EXTERNAL ARP or OFF as appropriate.
INTERNAL ARP: The radar source must be the MODEL1833/C series radar.
Select this item also for a NavNet unit being fed ARP targets.
EXTERNAL ARP: Receive TTM data sentence via NETWORK or NMEA port.
Target tracks are shown but targets cannot be acquired.
OFF: Turns off the ARP or TTM display.
4. Press the ENTER soft key.
5. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-36
2.25.2 Acquiring and tracking targets (ARP only)
Ten targets may be acquired and tracked manually and automatically. When you
attempt to acquire an eleventh target, the message “ARP FULL – ALREADY
TRACKING 10 TARGETS!” appears for five seconds. To acquire another target,
terminate tracking of an unnecessary target as shown in the paragraph 2.25.4.
Manual acquisition
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.
2. Press the TARGET soft key.
3. Place the cursor on the target to acquire and press the ACQ soft key.
4. Press the RETURN soft key.
The plot symbol changes its shape according to its status as below. A vector
appears about one minute after acquisition, indicating the target’s motion trend.
At acquisition 1 min. after
acquisition
3 min. after
acquisition
01*
01*
01*
Vector
* = Target number shown when TARGET ID NUMBER is
turned on in the ARP SETUP menu.
Target Number
ARP plot symbols
Automatic acquisition
The ARP can acquire up to ten targets automatically by setting an automatic
acquisition area. When automatic acquisition is selected after acquiring targets
manually, only the remaining capacity for targets may be automatically acquired.
For example, if seven targets have been manually acquired, three targets may
be automatically acquired.
1. Press the [MENU] key to show the main menu.
2. Press the ARP SETUP soft key to show the ARP SETUP menu.
3. Operate the cursor pad to select AUTO ACQUISITION AREA.
4. Press the EDIT soft key to show the automatic acquisition area window.
AUTO ACQ. AREA
▲
▼
OFF
ON
Automatic acquisition area window
5. Select ON.
6. Press the ENTER soft key.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-37
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu. An acquisition area of 2.0 to 2.5
miles in range and ±45º on either side of the heading line in bearing appears.
Note: Targets being tracked in automatic acquisition are continuously
tracked when switching to manual acquisition.
Automatic acquisition area
45° port
45° starboard
2.0 - 2.5 nm
Automatic acquisition area
2.25.3 Displaying target number (internal, external ARP)
Target number can be shown for ARP and TTM targets as below.
.250/ 319.9
°
T
.125nm
SP
H-UP
TARGET
TRAIL
TLL
OUTPUT
ACQ
TARGET
INFO
RETURN
ARP
Target
Number
01
+
359.9°R
0.240nm
ARP target number
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the ARP SETUP soft key.
3. Select TARGET ID NUMBER.
4. Press the EDIT soft key.
5. Select ON or OFF (default setting) as appropriate.
6. Press the ENTER soft key.
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-38
2.25.4 Terminating tracking of ARP targets
When 10 targets have been acquired, no more targets may be acquired unless
targets are cancelled. If you need to acquire additional targets, you must first
cancel one or more individual targets, or all of the targets, using one of the
procedures below.
Terminating tracking of selected targets
1. Place the cursor on the target to terminate tracking.
2. Press the [CLEAR] key to erase to terminate tracking and erase the target.
Terminating tracking of all targets
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key.
2. Select CANCEL ALL TARGETS.
3. Press the EDIT soft key.
CANCEL ALL TARGETS
▲
▼
YES
NO
Cancel all targets window
4. Select YES.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-39
2.25.5 Setting vector attributes (ARP)
What is a vector?
A vector is a line extending from a tracked target which shows estimated speed
and course of the target. The vector tip shows an estimated position of the target
after the selected vector time elapses. It can be useful to extend the vector
length in order to evaluate the risk of collision with any target.
Vector
Vector
Vector reference, vector time
You may reference the vectors to North (True) or ship’s heading (relative) as
desired. Vector time can be set to 30 seconds, 1, 3, 6, 15 or 30 minutes.
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key to show the ARP
SETUP menu.
2. Operate the cursor pad to select ARP VECTOR MODE.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the vector mode window.
ARP VECTOR MODE
RELATIVE
TRUE
Vector mode window
4. Select TRUE or RELATIVE as appropriate.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Select ARP VECTOR TIME, and then press the EDIT soft key to show the
ARP vector time window.
ARP VECTOR TIME
▲
▼
30 seconds
1 minute
3 minutes
6 minutes
15 minutes
30 minutes
ARP vector time window
7. Operate the cursor pad to select vector time among 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min, 6
min, 15 min and 30 min.
8. Press the ENTER soft key.
9. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-40
2.25.6 Displaying past position display (ARP)
This ARP can display time-spaced dots (maximum 10 dots) marking the past
positions of any targets being tracked. You can evaluate a target’s actions by the
spacing between dots. Below are examples of dot spacing and target movement.
(a) Ship turning
(b) Ship running
straight
(c) Ship reduced
speed
(d) Ship increased
speed
Past position displays
To turn the past position display on or off:
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key.
2. Operate the cursor pad to select HISTORY INTERVAL.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the plot interval window.
HISTORY INTERVAL
▲
▼
OFF
30 seconds
1 minutes
3 minutes
6 minutes
History interval window
4. Operate the cursor pad to select plotting interval among 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min
and 6 min, or select OFF to turn off the past position display.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-41
2.25.7 ARP, TTM target data
This ARP calculates motion trends (range, bearing, course, speed, CPA and
TCPA) of all target been tracked. You can show this data for a tracked target as
below. TARGET ID NUMBER, in the ARP SETUP menu, must be turned on to
show ARP target data.
1. Place the cursor on the target whose data you want to see.
2. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.
3. Press the TARGET and TARGET INFO soft keys. The data of the selected
target appears at the bottom left-hand corner of the display. (If an EBL/VRM
data box is displayed the ARP data box will be under it.)
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
5. To erase the ARP target data box, select the corresponding target with the
cursor and press the [CLEAR] key.
.250/ 319.9
°
T
.125nm
SP
H-UP
359.9°R
0.240nm
TARGET
TRAIL
TLL
OUTPUT
ACQ
TARGET
INFO
RETURN
ARP
Target
No.01 VECTOR TRUE 15min
CSE 359.9°T SPD 12.5kt
CPA 2nm TCPA 12.35
CPA and TCPA
Course and Speed
Target No., Vector Reference (True), Vector Time
01
Cursor
+
+
ARP target data
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-42
2.25.8 CPA/TCPA alarm (ARP)
When the predicted CPA of any target becomes smaller than a preset CPA alarm
range or its predicted TCPA less than a preset TCPA alarm limit, an audio alarm
sounds, which you may silence with the [CLEAR] key. In addition, the target plot
symbol of the offending target changes to a triangle and flashes together with its
vector. Press the [ALARM] key and the message COLLISION ALARM appears.
Press the CLEAR ALARM soft key to acknowledge the alarm. The flashing of the
triangle plot symbol continues until you intentionally terminate tracking of the
target. The ARP continuously monitors the predicted range at the Closest Point
of Approach (CPA) and predicted time to CPA (TCPA) of each target to own ship.
Provided that this feature is used correctly, it will help prevent the risk of collision
by alerting you to threatening targets. It is important that gain, A/C SEA, A/C
RAIN and other radar controls are properly adjusted and the ARP is set up so
that it can track targets effectively.
CPA/TCPA alarm ranges must be set up properly taking into consideration the
size, tonnage, speed, turning performance and other characteristics of own ship.
CAUTION
The CPA/TCPA alarm should never be
relied upon as the sole means for detect-
ing the risk of collision. The navigator is
not relieved of the responsibility to keep
visual lookout for avoiding collisions,
whether or not the radar or other plotting
aid is in use.
Follow the steps shown below to set the CPA/TCPA alarm range:
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key.
2. Operate the cursor pad to select CPA.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the CPA window.
CPA
▲
▼
OFF
0.5nm
1nm
2nm
3nm
5nm
6nm
CPA window
4. Select a CPA limit desired by the cursor pad.
5. Press the ENTER soft key. The ARP SETUP menu reappears.
6. Press the cursor pad to select TCPA.
7. Press the EDIT soft key to show the TCPA window.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-43
TCPA
▲
▼
30 seconds
1 minute
2 minutes
3 minutes
4 minutes
5 minutes
6 minutes
12 minutes
TCPA window
8. Select a TCPA limit.
9. Press the ENTER soft key.
10. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2.25.9 Lost target alarm (ARP)
When the system detects a lost target, the target symbol becomes a diamond
and tracking is discontinued after one minute.
1
Lost target mark
Canceling a lost target
1. Place the cursor on the target.
2. Press the [CLEAR] key.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-44
2.26 Interpreting the Radar Display
2.26.1 General
Minimum and maximum ranges
Minimum range
The minimum range is defined by the shortest distance at which, using a scale of
1.5 or 0.75 nm, a target having an echoing area of 10 m
2
is still shown separate
from the point representing the antenna position. It is mainly dependent on the
pulselength, antenna height, and signal processing such as main bang
suppression and digital quantization.
Maximum range
The maximum detecting range of the radar, Rmax, varies considerably
depending on several factors such as the height of the antenna above the
waterline, the height of the target above the sea, the size, shape and material of
the target, and atmospheric conditions.
Under normal atmospheric conditions, the maximum range is equal to the radar
horizon or a little shorter. The radar horizon is longer than the optical one by
about 6% because of the diffraction property of the radar signal. Rmax is given
in the following equation.
R
ma
x
= 2.2 x
(
h1 + h2
)
where Rmax: radar horizon (nautical miles)
h1: antenna height (m)
h2: target height (m)
Radar horizon
Optical horizon
Radar horizon
For example, if the height of the antenna above the waterline is 9 meters and the
height of the target is 16 meters, the maximum radar range is;
R
ma
x
= 2.2 x
(
9 + 16
)
= 2.2 x
(
3 + 4
)
= 15.4 n
m
It should be noted that the detection range is reduced by precipitation (which
absorbs the radar signal).
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-45
Radar resolution
There are two important factors in radar resolution (discrimination): bearing
resolution and range resolution.
Bearing resolution
Bearing resolution is the ability of the radar to display the
echoes received from two targets, which are at the same range and close
together, as separate targets. Bearing resolution is directly proportional to the
antenna length, and inversely proportional to the radar's wavelength.
Range resolution
Range resolution is the ability to display the echoes received
from two targets, which are on the same bearing and close to each other, as
separate targets.
Bearing accuracy
One of the most important features of the radar is how accurately the bearing of
a target can be measured. The accuracy of bearing measurement basically
depends on the narrowness of the radar beam. However, the bearing is usually
taken relative to the ship’s heading, and thus, proper adjustment of the heading
marker at installation is an important factor in ensuring bearing accuracy. To
minimize error when measuring the bearing of a target, select a range which will
put the target as far out to the edge of the radar screen as possible.
Range measurement
Measurement of the range to a target is also a very important function of the
radar. Generally, there are two means of measuring range: the fixed range rings
and the variable range marker (VRM). The fixed range rings appear on the
screen with a predetermined interval and provide a rough estimate of the range
to a target. The variable range marker’s diameter is increased or decreased so
that the marker touches the inner edge of the target, allowing the operator to
obtain more accurate range measurements.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-46
2.26.2 False echoes
Occasionally echo signals appear on the screen at positions where there is no
target, or disappear even if there are targets. False target situations may be
recognized, however, if you understand why they are displayed. Typical false
echoes are shown below.
Multiple echoes
Multiple echoes occur when a transmitted pulse returns from a solid object like a
large ship, bridge, or breakwater. A second, a third or more echoes may be
observed on the display at double, triple or other multiples of the actual range of
the target as shown below. Multiple reflection echoes can be reduced and often
removed by decreasing the gain (sensitivity) or properly adjusting the [A/C SEA]
control.
Own ship
Target
Tr ue
echo
Multiple
echo
Multiple echoes
Sidelobe echoes
Every time the radar pulse is transmitted, some radiation escapes on each side
of the beam. This stray RF is called sidelobe. If a target exists where it can be
detected by the side lobes as well as the main lobe, the side echoes may be
represented on both sides of the true echo at the same range. Sidelobes appear
usually only on short ranges and from strong targets. They can be reduced
through careful reduction of the gain or proper adjustment of the A/C SEA
control.
Target B
(True)
Target B
(Spurious)
Target A
Sidelobe echoes
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-47
Virtual image
A relatively large target close to your ship may be shown at two positions on the
screen. One of them is the true echo directly reflected by the target and the other
is a false echo which is caused by the mirror effect of a large object on or close
to your ship as shown in the figure below. If your ship comes close to a large
metal bridge, for example, such a false echo may temporarily be seen on the
screen.
Tr ue
echo
False
echo
Own
ship
Target ship
Mirror image
of target ship
Virtual image
Shadow sectors
Funnels, stacks, masts, or derricks in the path of the antenna block the radar
beam. If the angle subtended at the antenna is more than a few degrees, a
non-detecting sector or blind spot may be produced. Within this sector, targets
can not be detected.
Radar
antenna
Radar
mast
Shadow sector
Shadow sectors
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-48
2.26.3 SART (Search and Rescue Transponder)
A Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) may be triggered by any X-Band (3
cm) radar within a range of approximately 8 nm. Each radar pulse received
causes it to transmit a response which is swept repetitively across the complete
radar frequency band. When interrogated, it first sweeps rapidly (0.4 µs) through
the band before beginning a relatively slow sweep (7.5 µs) through the band
back to the starting frequency. This process is repeated for a total of twelve
complete cycles. At some point in each sweep, the SART frequency will match
that of the interrogating radar and be within the pass band of the radar receiver.
If the SART is within range, the frequency match during each of the 12 slow
sweeps will produce a response on the radar display, thus a line of 12 dots
equally spaced by about 0.64 nautical miles will be shown.
When the range to the SART is reduced to about 1 nm, the radar display may
show also the 12 responses generated during the fast sweeps. These additional
dot responses, which also are equally spaced by 0.64 nm, will be interspersed
with the original line of 12 dots. They will appear slightly weaker and smaller
than the original dots.
9500 MHz
9200 MHz
Radar antenna
beamwidth
Screen A: When SART
is distant
Screen B: When SART
is close
Lines of 12 dots
are displayed in
concentric arcs.
Echo of SART
Position of
SART
Own ship's
position
Own ship's
position
SART mark
length
Radar receiver
bandwidth
Sweep time
7.5 µs
95 µs
Sweep start
High speed sweep signal
Low speed sweep signal
24 NM
1.5 NM
Position of
SART
Echo of
SART
Appearance of SART signal on the radar display
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-49
General procedure for detecting SART response
1. Use the range scale of 6 or 12 nm as the spacing between the SART
responses is about 0.6 nm (1125 m) to distinguish the SART.
2. Turn off the automatic clutter suppression (if applicable).
3. Turn off the Interference Rejector.
General remarks on receiving SART
SART range errors
When responses from only the 12 low frequency sweeps are visible (when the
SART is at a range greater than about 1 nm), the position at which the first dot is
displayed may be as much as 0.64 nm beyond the true position of the SART.
When the range closes so that the fast sweep responses are seen also, the first
of these will be no more than 150 meters beyond the true position.
Radar bandwidth
This is normally matched to the radar pulselength and is usually switched with
the range scale and the associated pulselength. Narrow bandwidths of 3-5 MHz
are used with long pulses on long range and wide bandwidths of 10-25 MHz with
short pulses on short ranges.
Any radar bandwidth of less than 5 MHz will attenuate the SART signal slightly,
so it is preferable to use a medium bandwidth to ensure optimum detection of
the SART.
Radar side lobes
As the SART is approached, sidelobes from the radar antenna may show the
SART responses as a series of arcs or concentric rings. These can be removed
by the use of the [A/C SEA] control although it may be operationally useful to
observe the sidelobes as they may be easier to detect in clutter conditions and
also they will confirm that the SART is near to the ship.
Gain
For maximum range SART detection the normal gain setting for long range
detection should be used, that is, with background noise speckle visible.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-50
A/C SEA control
For optimum range SART detection, this control should be set to the minimum.
Care should be exercised as wanted target in sea clutter may be obscured. Note
also that in clutter conditions the first few dots of the SART response may not be
detectable, irrespective of the setting of the anti-clutter sea control. In this case,
the position of the SART may be estimated by measuring 9.5 nm from the
furthest dot back towards own ship.
Some sets have automatic/manual anti-clutter sea control facilities in which case
the operator should switch to manual.
A/C RAIN control
This should be used normally (to break up areas of rain) when trying to detect a
SART response which, being a series of dots, is not affected by the action of the
anti-clutter rain circuitry. Note that racon responses, which are often in the form
of a long flash, will be affected by the use of this control.
Some sets have automatic/manual anti-clutter rain control facilities in which case
the operator should switch to manual.
Note: This SART information is excerpted from IMO SN/Circ 197 Operation of
Marine Radar for SART Detection.
2.26.4 Racon (Radar Beacon)
A racon is a radar transponder which emits a characteristic signal when triggered
by a ship’s radar (usually only the 3 centimeter band). The signal may be emitted
on the same frequency as that of the triggering radar, in which case it is
superimposed on the ship's radar display automatically.
The racon signal appears on the PPI as a radial line originating at a point just
beyond the position of the radar beacon or as a Morse code signal (see figure
below) displayed radially from just beyond the beacon.
Racon
Appearance of racon signal on the radar display
3-1
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.1 Plotter Displays
You may show the plotter display over the entire screen, in the overlay screen
(MODEL1722C series), or in a combination screen. Press the [DISP] key to
show the screen selection window, and then rotate the [ENTER] knob to select
PLOT, NAV or OVRLY (overlay) as appropriate.
3.1.1 Full-screen plotter display
BRIDGE
FISH
002WP
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9° M TRIP NU
080° 22. 3456'E
19.9 kt 99.9 nm
MODE
NTH UP
NAV
POS
MARK
ENTRY
D. BOX
ON/OFF
16.0nm
S
I
M
Nav data window
(Data changes with NAV soft
key setting and cursor
status. For details see next page.)
Course bar
Functions for
soft keys
Own ship
track
Own ship
marker
Presentation mode
(North-up)
Icon (from left)
North Marker
Chart
Alarm
Battery
Track Hold
Chart Offset
Save
L/L Offset
Battery
Simulation
(See icon
table on
page A-14
for details.)
Waypoint name
Waypoint marker
Scale
Trip distance
Full-screen plotter display
Note: The own ship marker blinks when the GP-310B loses the GPS signal. For
the NavNet display units receiving the GPS signal, the message “No GPS
fix!” appears approx. one minute after the signal is lost and is
accompanied by the audio alarm. For the NavNet display unit connected
to the GP-310B, the visual alarm is released soon after loss and the audio
alarm sounds five minutes later.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-2
Nav data window
The data shown in the nav data window depends on the status of the NAV soft
key and the cursor.
359. 9° 359. 9 °
M
79. 9°F NU
19. 9kt 99. 9nm 345 ft
Bearing to Waypoint
Course, Speed
Range
to
Waypoint
Water Temp.,
Depth*
CSE
SOG
BRG
RNG
TMP
DPT
NAV
S/C
soft key
Presentation
Mode
Own Ship Mark Speed Trip Distance
NAV
POS
soft key
34°24. 3456'N 359. 9°
M
TRIP
NU
124°24. 3456'W 19. 9kt 99. 9nm
CourseLatitude, Longitude
Presentation
Mode
Own ship
position
Own ship
speed and
course
NAV
OFF
soft key
Turns off
nav data
window
* Requires appropriate
sensor.
34°24. 3456'N 359. 9°
M
TRIP
NU
124°24. 3456'W 59.9nm 99. 9nm
Bearing to Cursor
Latitude, Longitude
Trip Distance
Presentation
Mode
+
Cursor Mark
Latitude and longitude
of cursor intersection
Range to
Cursor
359. 9°
M
TTG
4D02H23M NU
19. 9nm
ETA
1st 13:45
Bearing to WaypointWaypoint Name
Estimated Time of
Arrival
Range to Waypoint
Waypoint Mark
001WPT
Presentation
Mode
NAV
WPT
soft key
Destination
waypoint
data
Time-to-Go
to Destination
359. 9°
M
359. 9°
M
TRIP
NU
19. 9nm 19. 9kt 99. 9nm
CourseBearing to WaypointWaypoint Name
001WPT
Waypoint data
(waypoint selected
with cursor)
Presentation
Mode
SpeedRange to WaypointWaypoint Mark Trip Distance
Contents of nav data window
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-3
3.1.2 Compass display
The compass display, displayed at the bottom half of the screen in the
combination display, provides steering information. The compass rose shows
two triangles: the black triangle (hollow on monochrome model) shows the
bearing to destination waypoint and the red (solid on monochrome) triangle,
which moves with ship’s course, shows own ship’s course.
The water temperature and depth graphs, which require appropriate sensors,
show the latest 10 minutes of temperature and depth data. The range of the
depth graph is 50 feet and it is automatically adjusted with depth.
Bearing scale
XTE monitor (See next page for description.)
Depth
graph*
Water
temperature
graph*
Time-to-go
to destination
Estimated time of
arrival at destination
Ship's course
(red and filled
on
color model, filled
on monochrome model
)
Destination
waypoint
Range to destination waypoint
Speed over ground
* = Requires appropriate
sensor.
Destination
waypoint bearing
(black and filled
on color model,
hollow on mono-
chrome model)
0
50
20
10
BRG
DPT
TMP
359.9°M
45.2ft
16.2°F
359.9°M
003WPT
0D 9H 59MTTG 23th23:59
ETA
SOG
10.0
kt
10.0
kt
STW
RNG
99.9nm
N
w
E
Speed through water
CSE
Direction to steer
(green on color model)
Shown (in red on
color model) when
direction to steer
is "left."
Own ship marker
(For color model, black when within XTE range,
yellow when over; flashes when over XTE range
on monochrome model)
Compass display
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-4
Reading the XTE (cross-track error) monitor
The XTE monitor, located below the compass rose, shows the amount you are
off course and the direction to steer to return to course. The own ship marker
shows the direction and amount your ship is off course. It is shown in black when
the amount of cross-track error is within the XTE monitor range and yellow when
it is over. (On the monochrome model it flashes when the amount of cross-track
error is more than the XTE monitor range.) An arrow appears at the right or left
side of the XTE monitor and it shows the direction to steer to return to intended
course. (For the color model the arrow is shown in red when you should steer
left, and green when you should steer right.) In the example on the previous
page you would steer right to return to course. To maintain course, steer the
vessel so the own ship marker stays at the center of the XTE monitor.
Soft keys
EDIT XT-LMT: Sets the range for XTE monitor scale. See the procedure below
for how to set.
RESTART NAVGATION TO
CURRENT WAYPOINT.
ARE YOU SURE?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
(Setting the range for the XTE monitor)
1. With the compass (or highway) display shown, press the EDIT XT-LMT soft
key to display the following window.
XTE LIMIT
0 .1nm
XTE range setting window
2. Use the cursor pad to select digit to change. Note that all digits may be
cleared by pressing the [CLEAR] key.
3. Use the [ENTER] knob to set value, or press the CANCEL soft key to cancel.
RESET XTE: Displayed when destination is set, and enables you to restart
navigation. When this soft key is pressed, the following message is displayed.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-5
3.1.3 Highway display
The highway display, displayed at the lower half of the screen in the combination
display, provides a graphic presentation of ship’s track along intended course. It
is useful for monitoring ship’s progress toward a waypoint. The own ship marker
shows relation between ship and intended course. The XTE monitor shows the
direction and amount your vessel is off course – the arrow shows the direction to
steer to return to your course and the numeric the distance you are off course.
Using the figure below as an example, you would steer right 0.009 nm to return
to course. To maintain course, steer the vessel so the own ship marker stays
aligned with the intended course line.
Time-to-go
to destination
Range to
destination waypoint
Estimated time of
arrival at destination
0.9 nm
WPT001
003WPT
0D 9H 59MTTG 23th23:59
ETA
SOG
10.0
kt
10.0
kt
STW
RNG
99.9 nm
Destination
waypoint
Own ship marker
Speed over ground, speed through water
XTE monitor
0.009nm
0.9 nm
XTE range
Intended
course
Destination waypoint
Direction to steer (green on color model)
Shown (in red on color model) when
direction to steer is "left."
Highway display
Soft keys
EDIT XT-LMT: Sets the range for the XTE monitor scale. See the procedure on
the previous page for how to set.
RESET XTE: Displayed when destination is set, and enables you to restart
navigation. See the description on the previous page.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-6
3.1.4 Nav data display
The nav data display provides comprehensive navigation data. The user may
select what data to display and where to display it, on the NAV DATA DISPLAY
SETUP menu. For details see paragraph “5.8 Nav Data Display Setup.”
Appropriate sensors are required. Bars ( - -) appear when corresponding sensor
is not connected.
ETA
TTGTRIP LOG
103
nm
TIMEDATE
FEB 1
0
D
2
H
30
M
1st 1:25
01:27:05
2001
POSITION
34° 34. 5678' N
120° 34. 5678'
W
SOGWPT POSITION
COURSESTW
10.0
kt
RANGEBEARING
9.2°
M
TEMPDEPTH
Speed over ground
Position
Water temperature
Range to
waypoint
Course
Bearing to
waypoint
Speed through
water
Waypoint
Position
Depth
Half-screen display
Full-screen display
34° 14. 5678' N
120° 14. 5678'
W
10.0
kt
101.6°
M
0.18
nm
1324.1
ft
18.2 °
C
Nav data displays
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-7
3.2 Presentation Mode
Three types of presentation modes are provided for the plotter display: north-up,
course-up and auto course-up. To change the presentation mode, first press the
[HIDE/SHOW] key if the plotter soft keys are not displayed. Press the MODE soft
key to select desired mode. Each press of the key changes the presentation
mode and presentation mode indication (top right-hand corner of the screen)
cyclically in the sequence of North-up, Course-up and Auto course-up.
3.2.1 North-up
North is at the top of the display and own ship, shown by a filled circle. This
mode is useful for long-range navigation.
BRIDGE
FISH
WP-002
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9° TRIP NU
080° 22. 3456'E
19.9 kt 99.9 nm
MODE
NTH UP
NAV
POS
MARK
ENTRY
16.0nm
D.BOX
ON/ OFF
Plotter display, north-up mode
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-8
3.2.2 Course-up
The destination is at the top of the screen when a destination is set. When no
destination is set, the course or heading is at the top of the screen at the
moment the course-up mode is selected. A filled triangle marks own ship’s
position.
Note: The data sentences GGA and VTG must be output from the NavNet
display unit connected to the GPS navigator in order to correctly orient the own
ship marker in the course-up mode on other NavNet display units.
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°
M
TRIP
CU
080° 22. 3456'E
19.9 kt 99.9 nm
GO TO
CURSOR
MODE
CSE UP
CENTER
MARK
ENTRY
+
WPT 001
16.0nm
D. BOX
ON/ OFF
Plotter display, course-up mode, destination set
3.2.3 Auto course-up
The course is at the top of screen at the moment the auto course-up mode is
selected. n this mode, the current course is kept at the top of the screen within
22.5 degrees. For example, if your vessel turns for than 22.5 degrees to port or
starboard, the chart display will rotate so that your course is pointing towards the
top of the screen again.. A filled triangle marks own ship’s position.
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9° M TRIP CU
080° 22. 3456'E
19.9 kt 99.9 nm
GOTO
CURSOR
MODE
AT CU
CENTER
MARK
ENTRY
+
16.0 nm
D. BOX
ON/OFF
Plotter display, auto course-up mode
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-9
3.3 Shifting the Display
The plotter display can be shifted on the plotter display as below.
1. Press the cursor pad to display the cursor.
2. Locate the cursor at a screen edge and press and hold down the cursor pad.
The screen shifts in the direction opposite of cursor location.
3. To automatically return the cursor to the screen center, press the CENTER
soft key. This also returns own ship marker to the screen center.
3.4 Chart Scale
Chart scale (range) may be selected with the [RANGE -] or [RANGE +] key. The
[-] key expands the chart range; the [+] key shrinks it.
Charts scales
nm 0.125 0.25 0.5 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024
km 0.23 0.46 0.93 1.85 3.70 7.41 14.8 29.6 59.3 119 237 474 948 1896
sm 0.144 0.29 0.58 1.15 2.30 4.60 9.21 18.4 36.8 73.7 147 295 589 1178
Note: When the display is expanded or shrunk beyond the range of the chart
card in use the message “NO CHART” appears, along with the appropriate
chart icon. See the illustration on the next page for details.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-10
3.5 Chart Cards
3.5.1 Chart card overview
Your system reads FURUNO and NavCharts™ (NAVIONICS) charts, or C-MAP
charts, depending on its specification.
When you insert a suitable chart card in the slot and your boat is near any chart
graphic data, a chart appears. If a wrong card is inserted or a wrong chart scale
is selected, land masses will appear hollow. Insert the proper card and select a
suitable chart scale. Chart icons appear at the top of the display to help you
select a suitable chart scale. The table below shows the chart icons and their
meanings.
Chart icons and their meanings
Icon Meaning
Proper card is not inserted or
chart scale is too small.
Operate the RANGE key to
adjust chart scale.
Chart scale is too large.
Operate the RANGE key to
adjust chart scale.
Suitable chart scale is
selected.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-11
3.5.2 Indices and chart enlargement
When the [RANGE] key is operated, you will see several frames appear on the
chart. These frames are called indices and they show you what parts of the chart
can be zoomed in on.
Sample chart (Japan) showing indices
When a chart cannot be displayed
A chart will not be displayed in the following conditions:
• When the chart scale is too large or too small.
• When scrolling the chart outside the indices.
• When this happens, select proper chart scale.
Note: Indices can be turned on or off with “Chart border line.” See page 5-13 for
FURUNO and NAVIONICS charts and 5-16 for C-MAP charts.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-12
3.5.3 FURUNO and NavCharts
™
Chart symbols
The table below shows FURUNO and NavCharts
™ mini chart symbols and their
meanings.
Chart symbols
Symbol Description
Summit
Wreck
Lighthouse
Lighted Buoy
Buoy
Radio Station
Symbol Description
Position of Sounding
Obstruction
Fishing Reef
Platform
Anchorage
Data for aids to navigation
Selected FURUNO and NavCharts
™ charts can show buoy and lighthouse data.
Simply place the cursor on the lighthouse or buoy mark.
Place the cursor on
a lighthouse or buoy mark.
Lighthouse mark
NAVAID: /FL 6S 12M
FROM OS 52.38nm 48.0°
Period (ex.: 6 seconds)
Visibility in nautical
mile (ex.: 12 miles)
FL : Flashing
F : Fixed light
F FL : Fixed and Flashing light
MO : Morse code light
Oc : Occulting light
Example of data displayed
Range and bearing
from own ship
Example of buoy, lighthouse data
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-13
Port service icons (NavCharts™ only)
NavCharts
™ show services available at ports, with icons. Use the cursor pad to
place the cursor on the sailboat icon (denotes a port or harbor), and then push
the [ENTER] knob. The services available appear at the top of the display.
Emergency
medical service
Water
supply station
Customer
service station
Information center
Fueling station
Traveler's
service station
Marine
equipment service
Port
Sailboat icon (Port)
Detailed information of service
selected
List of services
at the port selected
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°M
TRIP
NU
080° 22. 3456'E
19.9 kt 99.9 nm
+
CANCEL
FIRST AID
16.0nm
Plotter display, showing port service display
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-14
3.5.4 C-MAP cards
Cursor and data display
Besides its fundamental functions of providing position data, the cursor can also
show caution area, depth area, source of data, etc. on C-map charts. In addition,
you can display information about an icon by placing the cursor on it.
1. Press the cursor pad to turn the cursor on.
2. Use the cursor pad to place the cursor on the position desired.
3. Push the [ENTER] knob to open the Objects window.
Objects
Navigation mark, fixed
Beacon, generic
Light
Light
Depth area
Source of data
Objects window
4. Use the cursor pad to select the item desired.
5. Push the [ENTER] knob to display details for object selected.
Navigation Mark, fixed
Light
Color
White
Height
12.0 Meters
Light characteristic
flashing
Sectorlimit one
64.0 Degrees
Sectorlimit two
138.0 Degrees
Signal group
(3)
Signal period
10.0 Seconds
Example of caution area window
6. Press the RETURN soft key to close the window.
7. Repeat step 4 to 6 to select other item.
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-15
Icon data
You may place the cursor on any icon to find information about the selected icon.
1. For example, place the cursor on a lighthouse icon.
Place the cursor on a lighthouse icon.
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°
M
TRIP
NU
080° 22. 3456'E
19.9 kt 99.9 nm
GO TO
CURSOR
CENTER
+
MARK
ENTRY
16.0nm
D. BOX
ON /OFF
MODE
NTH UP
Lighthouse icon
2. Push the [ENTER] knob to show data. For example, the following window
appears for a lighthouse.
Objects
Lighthouse
Tower
Light
Underwater Lock
Depth contour
Depth contour
Depth area
Source of data
Object windows
3. Use the cursor pad to select the item desired.
4. Push the [ENTER] knob to display detailed information.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-16
Color
white
Height
7. 00 Meters
Light characteristic
occulting
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
Navigation mark, fixed
Light.
Sample lighthouse data
5. Press the RETURN soft key to close the Objects window.
Tide information
The C-MAP chart card provides for calculation of the tide heights for any date.
Additionally it displays the times of sunrise and sunset.
1. Press the cursor pad to place the cursor on a Tide icon (
T
).
2. Push the [ENTER] knob to open the Objects window.
34 24. 3456 N 359.9 NU
124 24. 3456 W 59.9kt 024nm
+
OBJECTS
Tide height
Cartographic area
Source of data
T
RETURN
Objects window
3. Use the cursor pad to select “Tide height.”
4. Push the [ENTER] knob to open the TIDE window.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-17
Time: 04:35
Height: 0.45ft
Draught: 0.65ft
01/07/30 +13:30
43° 32.860N
010° 18.022E
Port info
LIVORNO (LEGHORN)
High Water(max)
0.86ft(13:30 L)
Low Water(min)
0.35ft(21:00 L)
Sunrise
07:52L
Sunset
16:53 L
0.86
0.74
0.61
0.48
0.35
04812162024
RETURN
DATE
Vertical
Cursor
TRIP
NU
t 99.9 nm
Horizontal
Cursor
Tide window
5. Press the DATE soft key to open the DATE window.
CHANGE DATE
(DAY. MONTH. YEAR)
01. 01. 2001
LIMIT: 31.12.2099
Date window
6. Use ◄ or ► to position the cursor where desired and then rotate the
[ENTER] knob to set. Repeat to enter complete date.
7. Push the [ENTER] knob to show the tidal graph for entered date.
8. Use ◄ or ► to locate the vertical cursor on the hour desired.
9. Use ▲ or ▼ to shift the level cursor to select draught.
10. See the time, height and draught indications below the tide graph for tide
information.
11. Press the RETURN soft key to close the TIDE window.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-18
3.6 Working with Track
Your ship’s track is plotted on the screen using navigation data fed from a
navigation receiver. This section shows you what you can do with track, from
turning it on or off to changing its plotting interval. Own ship’s track is displayed
in the default setting and on the color model it is red.
3.6.1 Displaying track
Own ship track
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP
ON
TARGET TRACK DISPLAY
ON
INTERVAL
TIME
TIME INTERVAL
00m10s
DISTANCE INTERVAL
00.10nm
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK : 9/6000
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP
ON
OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR
RED
TARGET TRACK DISPLAY
ON
TARGET TRACK COLOR
WHITE
INTERVAL
TIME
TIME INTERVAL
00m10s
DISTANCE INTERVAL
00.10nm
MEMORY(TRACK & MARK)
2000PTS
(MARK MEMORY)
(6000)POINTS
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK : 9/6000
MODEL1722 seriesMODEL1722C series
TRACK
CONTROL
EDIT
ERASE
T & M
MARK
SETUP
RETURN
TRACK
RESUME
EDIT
ERASE
T & M
MARK
SETUP
RETURN
TRACK
RESUME
TRACK
CONTROL
MEMORY(TRACK & MARK)
2000PTS
(MARK MEMORY)
(6000)POINTS
Track control menu
2. Use the cursor pad to select OWN SHIP TRACK DISP.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the track display window.
4. Use the cursor pad to select ON (default setting) or OFF as appropriate.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Note: The number of track and mark points used appears at the SHIP’S TRACK
STATUS window on the TRACK CONTROL menu. Using the figure above
as an example, 1234 points of track and 9 marks have been recorded.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-19
Target track
Target track, NMEA format TTM data sentence (target data fed from an ARP
board-equipped MODEL1833/1833C series network radar), may be turned on or
off as desired. The default setting is ON.
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select TARGET TRACK DISPLAY.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the target track display window.
4. Use the cursor pad to select to ON or OFF as appropriate.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3.6.2 Stopping, restarting plotting of own ship track
When your boat is at anchor or returning to port you probably won’t need to
record its track. You can stop recording the track, to conserve the track memory,
as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
NOT TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK : 9/6000
▲
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK : 9/6000
▲
TRACK
CONTROL
EDIT
ERASE
T & M
MARK
SETUP
RETURN
TRACK
RESUME
EDIT
ERASE
T & M
MARK
SETUP
RETURN
TRACK
HALT
TRACK
CONTROL
TRACK
HALT
TRACK
RESUME
Track is plotted
Track not plotted
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP
ON
OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR
RED
TARGET TRACK DISPLAY
ON
TARGET TRACK COLOR
WHITE
INTERVAL
TIME
TIME INTERVAL
00m10s
DISTANCE INTERVAL
00.10nm
MEMORY(TRACK & MARK)
2000PTS
(MARK MEMORY)
(6000)POINTS
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP
ON
OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR
RED
TARGET TRACK DISPLAY
ON
TARGET TRACK COLOR
WHITE
INTERVAL
TIME
TIME INTERVAL
00m10s
DISTANCE INTERVAL
00.10nm
MEMORY(TRACK & MARK)
2000PTS
(MARK MEMORY)
(6000)POINTS
Track control menu (MODEL1722C series)
2. Press the TRACK RESUME soft key. The soft key now shows “TRACK
HALT” and the indication “TRACKING” in the SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
window changes to “NOT TRACKING.” In addition, the icon “H” is displayed
at the top of the plotter display and own ship marker becomes a hollow circle.
To restart plotting the track, press the TRACK HALT soft key.
3. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-20
3.6.3 Changing track color (MODEL1722C series)
Track can be displayed in red (default setting), yellow, green, light-blue, purple,
blue and white. It can be useful to change track color on a regular basis to
discriminate between previous day’s track, etc.
Own ship’s track
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the track color window.
TRACK COLOR
▲
RED
YELLOW
GREEN
LIGHT BLUE
PURPLE
BLUE
WHITE
▼
Own ship track color window
4. Use the cursor pad to select the color desired.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Target track
Like own ship’s track, target tracks can be displayed in red (default setting),
yellow, green, light-blue, purple, blue and white.
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select TARGET TRACK COLOR.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the track color window.
4. Use the cursor pad to select the color desired.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-21
3.6.4 Track plotting method and interval for own ship track
In drawing the own ship track, first the ship’s position fed from a navigation
receiver is stored into the unit’s memory at an interval of time or distance. A
shorter interval provides for better reconstruction of the track, but the storage
time of the track is reduced. When the track memory becomes full, the oldest
track is erased to make room for the latest.
Track plotting method
Track may be plotted by time or distance interval. The default setting is “time.”
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select INTERVAL.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the plot window.
INTERVAL
▲
TIME
DISTANCE
▼
Plot window
4. Use the cursor pad to select TIME or DISTANCE as appropriate. Distance is
useful for conserving track memory, since no track is recorded when the boat
is stationary.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Track plotting interval
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select TIME INTERVAL or DISTANCE INTERVAL as
appropriate.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the time or distance interval window,
depending on what you selected at step 2.
TIME INTERVAL
00m10s
(When selecting TIME INTERVAL.)
DISTANCE INTERVAL
00.10nm
(When selecting DISTANCE INTERVAL.)
Setting range: 0 min 01 sec (continuous) - 99 min 59 sec
Default setting: 10 sec
Setting range: 00.01 nm (continuous) - 99.99 nm (km, sm)
Default setting: 0.1 nm
Interval windows
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-22
4. Use the [ENTER] knob and the cursor pad to enter numeric data. The
[CLEAR] key functions to clear an entire line of data.
5. Push the [ENTER] knob or ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3.6.5 Changing own ship track/mark distribution setting
The equipment stores a total of 8000 points of track and marks. This amount
may be distributed as desired, and the default setting is 2000 points of track and
6000 marks.
When you change the track memory setting all tracks and marks in the memory
are erased. If necessary save the data to a memory card. For further details see
paragraph “6.1.2 Saving data to a memory card”.
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select MEMORY (TRACK & MARK).
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the memory (track & mark) window.
TRACK MEMORY
2000/8000 POINTS
Memory (track & mark) window
4. Use the [ENTER] knob to enter desired number of track memory points.
5. Push the ENTER soft key or [ENTER] knob. You are asked if you are sure to
change the track memory capacity.
6. Push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-23
3.6.6 Erasing track
This paragraph shows you how to erase own ship’s track and target tracks. You
can erase ship’s track three ways: collectively, by color (color model only) and by
area.
Erasing own ship track by area
You can erase own ship’s track by area as below. This function is not available
on the overlay display (MODEL1722C series).
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
ERASE ALL TRACKS
ERASE TRACKS BY AREA
ERASE TARGET TRACKS
ERASE ALL MARKS/LINES
ERASE MARKS BY AREA
ERASE ALL TRACKS
ERASE TRACKS BY AREA
ERASE TRACKS BY COLOR
ERASE TARGET TRACKS
ERASE ALL MARKS/LINES
ERASE MARKS BY AREA
ERASE
ERASE
RETURNRETURN
EDIT EDIT
MODEL1722 seriesMODEL1722C series
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK : 9/6000
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK : 9/6000
Erase menu
2. Use the cursor pad to select ERASE TRACKS BY AREA and press the EDIT
soft key. The menu is erased and the plotter display appears.
3. Use the cursor pad to place the cursor at the top left of corner which you
want to erase track from.
4. Press the START soft key or the [ENTER] knob.
5. Drag the cursor diagonally to the bottom right corner of the area which you
want to erase track from.
6. Press the END soft key or the [ENTER] knob. You are asked if it is all right to
delete the track.
7. Push the [ENTER] knob to delete the track selected.
8. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-24
Erasing own ship track by color (color model)
You may erase own ship’s track by color as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select ERASE TRACKS BY COLOR and press the
EDIT soft key.
ERASE TRK BY COLOR
▲
RED
YELLOW
GREEN
LIGHT BLUE
PURPLE
BLUE
WHITE
▼
Erase track by color window
3. Use the cursor pad to select the color you want to erase and push the
[ENTER] knob or ENTER soft key. You are asked if it is all right to delete the
track.
4. Push the [ENTER] knob to erase track color selected.
5. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.
Erasing all own ship track
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select ERASE ALL TRACKS and press the EDIT soft
key.
3. Push the [ENTER] knob to erase all own ship track.
4. Press the RETURN soft key.
5. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Erasing all target tracks
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select ERASE TARGET TRACKS and press the EDIT
soft key.
3. Push the [ENTER] knob to erase all target tracks.
4. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-25
3.7 Marks, Lines
Marks are useful for denoting important points such as a good fishing spot.
Marks can be inscribed in seven shapes and seven colors (MODEL1722C
series): Red, yellow, green, light-blue, purple, blue and white.
✕
Mark shapes
3.7.1 Entering a mark
1. Place the cursor on the location where you want a mark to appear.
2. Press the MARK ENTRY soft key. (Press the [HIDE/SHOW] key if the plotter
soft keys are not shown.)
The mark is inscribed in the size and shape selected on the MARKS & LINES
menu. The default mark attributes are size, normal; color (MODEL1722C series),
yellow, and shape, hollow circle (
○
).
3.7.2 Changing mark attributes
You can select the shape and for marks on the MARKS & LINES menu.
1. Press the [MENU] key to show the menu.
2. Press the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS CONTROL and MARK
SETUP soft keys to show the MARKS & LINES menu.
MARKS/LINES COLOR
YELLOW
MARKS SHAPE
LINES STYLE
MARKS SIZE
LARGE
MARKS &
LINES
MARKS SHAPE
LINES STYLE
MARKS SIZE
LARGE
MODEL1722C series MODEL1722 series
MARKS &
LINES
RETURN
EDIT
RETURN
EDIT
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK : 9/6000
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK : 9/6000
.
.
Marks & lines menu
3. For the MODEL1722C series, do the following to select mark and line color.
Select MARKS/LINES COLOR and press the EDIT soft key.
Use the cursor pad to choose color desired and press the ENTER soft key.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-26
4. Select MARKS SHAPE and press the EDIT soft key.
MARK SHAPE
▲
▼
✕
Mark shape window
5. Use the cursor pad to select mark shape desired and then press the
RETURN soft key.
6. Select MARKS SIZE and press the EDIT soft key.
7. Use the cursor pad to select LARGE (default setting) or SMALL as
appropriate.
8. Press [ENTER] knob or ENTER soft key.
9. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.
3.7.3 Selecting line type
You may inscribe lines to denote good fishing spots, areas of special interest, etc.
You can even construct simple charts.
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and MARKS SETUP soft keys to show the MARK & LINES
menu.
MARKS/LINES COLOR
YELLOW
MARKS SHAPE
LINES STYLE
MARKS SIZE
LARGE
MARKS &
LINES
MARKS SHAPE
LINES STYLE
MARKS SIZE
LARGE
MODEL1722C series MODEL1722 series
MARKS &
LINES
RETURN
EDIT
RETURN
EDIT
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK : 9/6000
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK : 9/6000
.
.
Marks & lines menu
2. Select LINE STYLE and press the EDIT soft key.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-27
LINES STYLE
▲
▼
Mark line window
3. Use the cursor pad to select line style desired and press the ENTER soft key.
Line style “dot” disables line drawing. The joint between lines is determined
by mark shape. For example, selecting the circle shape will join lines with a
circle as below.
4. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3.7.4 Erasing marks, lines
Erasing an individual mark
1. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on the mark you want to erase.
2. Press the [CLEAR] key to erase the mark.
Erasing an individual line
1. Place the cursor on an end of the line to erase and press the [CLEAR] key.
2. Placing the cursor at the intersecting point of two line segments will erase
both line segments.
Erasing marks, lines by area
This function is not available on the overlay area (MODEL1722C series).
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select ERASE MARKS BY AREA and press the EDIT
soft key. The menu is erased and the plotter display appears.
3. Use the cursor pad to place the cursor at the top left-hand corner of the area
which is to enclose the marks/lines to erase.
4. Press the START soft key or the [ENTER] knob.
5. Drag the cursor to the bottom right-hand corner of the area which is to
enclose the marks/lines to erase.
6. Press the END soft key or the [ENTER] knob. You are asked if it is all right to
delete the marks/lines selected. Press the [ENTER] knob to delete.
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-28
Erasing all marks, lines
You can erase all marks and lines. Be absolutely sure you want to erase all
marks and lines - erased marks and lines cannot be restored.
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select ERASE ALL MARKS/LINES and press the EDIT
soft key.
3. Push the [ENTER] knob to erase all marks and lines.
4. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-29
3.8 Waypoints
In navigation terminology, a waypoint is a particular location on a voyage
whether it be a starting, intermediate or destination point. A waypoint is the
simplest piece of information your equipment requires to get you to a destination,
in the shortest distance possible.
This unit has 999 waypoints into which you can enter position information. You
may enter a waypoint five ways: at own ship position, at MOB position
(page3-61), by cursor, by range and bearing, and through the waypoint list
(manual input of latitude and longitude).
3.8.1 Entering waypoints
Entering a waypoint at own ship position
Press the [SAVE/MOB] key momentarily to store your position as a waypoint.
This new waypoint will automatically be saved in the waypoint list, under the
youngest empty waypoint number.
Entering a waypoint with the cursor
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES, WAYPOINTS and WAYPOINT BY
CURSOR soft keys. The plotter display appears.
3. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on the location desired.
4. Press the NEW WPT soft key. The waypoint window appears and it shows
waypoint mark shape, waypoint name, comment (default: time and date),
position of waypoint and proximity alarm radius.
NEW
WPT
SELECT
MARK
COORD
TYPE
N < - -> S
E < - -> W
SAVE
RETURN
▲
34°44.000'N
135°21.000'W
359.9°
0.00nm
002WPT
00:00 01JAN00
34°44.000'N
135°21.000'W
359.9°
0.00nm
003WPT
00:00 01JAN00
34°44.000'N
135°21.000'W
359.9°
0.00nm
COMMENT
02:36 01JAN01
POSITION
LAT
34° 12. 134'N
LON
134° 12. 345'W
PROXIMITY ALARM RADIUS
0. 00nm
MARK
001WPT
NAME
Waypoint window
5. If you do not need to change the waypoint data, press the SAVE soft key
to register the waypoint. The steps which follow show you how to change
waypoint data.
6. For the color model, press the SELECT MARK soft key.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-30
7. Press the MARK SHAPE soft key to open the mark shape selection window.
SELECT MARK
Waypoint mark shape selection window
8. Operate the cursor pad to select shape desired.
9. Press the ENTER soft key.
10. For the MODEL1722C series, press the SELECT MARK and MARK
COLOR soft keys in that order to open the waypoint mark color selection
window. Select color desired and press the ENTER soft key.
SELECT COLOR
▲
RED
YELLOW
GREEN
LIGHT BLUE
PURPLE
BLUE
WHITE
▼
Waypoint mark color selection window
Note: You cannot change the shape and color of a waypoint when the
proximity alarm radius for it is other than “zero.” To change shape or
color, enter all zeroes as the proximity alarm radius.
11. You can change the name (1 to 6 characters), comment (13 characters), L/L
position and the proximity alarm radius for a waypoint as follows:
a) Use the cursor pad to select the NAME, COMMENT, POSITION or
PROXIMITY ALARM RADIUS field. (“Proximity alarm radius” provides for
visual and aural alarms when your boat nears a waypoint by the distance
specified. A circle with a diagonal line through it marks any waypoint for
which its proximity alarm radius is other than zero.)
b) Use the cursor pad to select location.
c) Rotate the [ENTER] knob to select appropriate alphanumeric character.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-31
12. Press the SAVE soft key to register the waypoint.
13. Enter another waypoint with the cursor, or press the [MENU] key to close the
menu.
Entering a waypoint by range and bearing
This method is useful when you want to enter a waypoint using range and
bearing to a target found on a radar.
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES, WAYPOINTS and WAYPOINT BY RNG &
BRG soft keys.
3. An “X” (red on the MODEL1722C series) appears at own ship position, and it
is the origin point for range and bearing. Operate the cursor pad to place the
cursor on the location desired. Range and bearing from own ship to the
cursor appear at the top of the display.
Note: The origin point of range and bearing can be shifted to the location
desired. Operate the cursor pad to select location, and then press the
START POINT soft key.
4. Press the NEW WPT soft key. The waypoint window appears and it shows
mark shape, waypoint name, comment (default: date and time), position of
waypoint and proximity alarm radius.
NEW
WPT
SELECT
MARK
COORD
TYPE
N < - -> S
E < - -> W
SAVE
RETURN
▲
34°44.000'N
135°21.000'W
359.9°
0.00nm
002WPT
00:00 01JAN00
34°44.000'N
135°21.000'W
359.9°
0.00nm
003WPT
00:00 01JAN00
34°44.000'N
135°21.000'W
359.9°
0.00nm
COMMENT
02:36 01JAN01
POSITION
LAT
34° 12. 134'N
LON
134° 12. 345'W
PROXIMITY ALARM RADIUS
0. 00nm
MARK
001WPT
NAME
Waypoint window
5. If necessary, change waypoint data following the instructions from step 6 in
“Entering a waypoint with the cursor” on page 3-29.
6. Press the SAVE soft key to register the waypoint. To enter another waypoint
with the cursor select desired location with the cursor pad and press the
NEW WPT soft key.
7. Press the [RETURN] key to close the menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-32
Entering a waypoint from the waypoint list
You can manually enter waypoint position from the waypoint list as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and WAYPOINTS soft keys.
3. Press the LOCAL LIST (lists waypoints in order from nearest to furthest) or
ALPHANUMERIC LIST (lists waypoints in alphanumeric order) soft key.
Alphanumeric waypoint list
▲
WPT
LOCAL
Local waypoint list
GOTO
NEW
WPT
EDIT
WPT
ERASE
WPT
RETURN
WPT
ALPHA
GOTO
NEW
WPT
EDIT
WPT
ERASE
WPT
RETURN
▲
▲
ABALONE
35°47.010'N
135°21.000'W
00:00 01JAN01
350.9°
3.80 nm
CRAB
34°42.000'N
135°21.050'W
00:00 01JAN01
050.9°
1.98 nm
FISH
34°41.000'N
135°21.030'W
00:00 01JAN01
065.9°
1.83 nm
LOBSTER
38°44.300'N
135°21.010'W
00:00 01JAN01
144.9°
4.93nm
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
SEARCH FOR
---
CRAB
34°42.000'N
135°21.050'W
00:00 01JAN01
050.9°
1.98 nm
FISH
34°41.000'N
135°21.030'W
00:00 01JAN01
065.9°
1.83 nm
LOBSTER
38°44.300'N
135°21.010'W
00:00 01JAN01
144.9°
4.93nm
ABALONE
35°47.010'N
135°21.000'W
00:00 01JAN01
350.9°
3.80 nm
Alphanumeric and local waypoint lists
4. Press the NEW WPT soft key to show the waypoint window (see the figure
on the previous page). Own ship position is shown in the position box.
5. Select the position box and enter waypoint position desired, using the cursor
pad to select location and rotating the [ENTER] knob to enter digit.
6. If desired change waypoint data following the instructions from step 6 in
“Entering a waypoint with the cursor” on page 3-29.
7. Press the SAVE soft key to register the waypoint.
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3.8.2 Editing waypoint data
Waypoint data may be edited from the waypoint list or directly from the plotter
display.
Editing waypoint data from the waypoint list
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and WAYPOINTS soft keys.
3. Press the LOCAL LIST or ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft key as appropriate.
4. Use the cursor pad to select the waypoint you want to edit.
5. Press the EDIT WPT soft key.
6. Edit waypoint as appropriate.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-33
7. Press the SAVE soft key.
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Editing a waypoint from the plotter display
You may change edit waypoints from the plotter display as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and
WAYPOINTS soft key to open the waypoint menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINT BY CURSOR soft key.
3. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on the waypoint which you want
to change. A flashing diamond mark appears on the waypoint when it is
correctly selected.
4. Press the EDIT/MOVE soft key. Three soft keys replace the EDIT/MOVE soft
key:
EDIT WPT: Edit from the waypoint entry window.
MOVE WPT: Move waypoint to new position with the cursor.
ERASE WPT: Erase waypoint, see paragraph 3.8.3.
5. Press appropriate soft key. If you pressed the EDIT WPT soft key the
waypoint entry window appears; edit data as appropriate. For MOVE WPT do
the following:
a) Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on the location desired for the
waypoint. A line connects previous position and new position.
b) Push the [ENTER] knob. The waypoint moves to the cursor position and
its new position is recorded on the waypoint list. If the waypoint is set as
destination or is part of a route, you are asked if you are sure to move the
waypoint. In this case, push the [ENTER] knob to move the waypoint, or
press the [CLEAR] key to cancel.
7. Press the MENU key to finish.
BRIDGE
FISH
WP-002
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°
M
TRIP
NU
080° 22. 3456'E
59.9 nm 99.9 nm
RNG
BRG
CANCEL
+
Press to alternately display
range/bearing from own ship
to cursor, range/bearing from
original waypoint position to
cursor position.
Below is an example of the
range/bearing from original
waypoint position to cursor
position.
(2) Drag cursor to new position,
then push the [ENTER] knob.
Range and bearing from
own ship to cursor
34° 22. 3456’N FROM 5.3°M
080° 22. 3456’E
FISH 1.45 nm
+
(1) Select waypoint to move,
then press EDIT/MOVE
and MOVE WPT soft keys.
16.0nm
Plotter display
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-34
3.8.3 Erasing waypoints
Erasing a waypoint with the cursor
1. Press the cursor pad to turn on the cursor.
2. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on the waypoint you want to erase.
A flashing diamond mark appears over the waypoint when the waypoint is
correctly selected.
3. Press the [CLEAR] key. You are asked if you are sure to erase the waypoint.
4. Push the [ENTER] knob. The waypoint is erased from both the plotter screen
(if it is currently displayed) and the waypoint list.
Note: You may also erase a waypoint while the waypoint menu is active as
follows:
a) Place the cursor on the waypoint to erase.
b) Press the EDIT/MOVE soft key.
c) Press the ERASE WPT soft key followed by the [ENTER] knob.
d) Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
Erasing a waypoint from the waypoint list
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and WAYPOINTS soft keys.
3. Press the LOCAL LIST or ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft key.
4. Use the cursor pad to select the waypoint you want to erase.
5. Press the ERASE WPT soft key. You are asked if you are sure to erase the
waypoint.
6. Push the [ENTER] knob. The waypoint is erased from both the waypoint list
and the plotter screen (if it is currently displayed).
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-35
3.8.4 Changing waypoint mark size (FURUNO, NavCharts™)
You may change the size of all waypoint marks to small or large (default), or you
may turn them off.
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the CHART SETUP and CHART DETAILS soft keys.
LAT LON GRID
ON
TEXT INFORMATION
ON
WAYPOINTS
LARGE
WAYPOINT NAMES
ON
CHART BORDER LINES
ON
LANDMASS
ON
NAVAIDS
ON
LIGHT SECTOR INFO
ON
OTHER SYMBOLS
ON
MARKS SIZE
LARGE
MODEL1722 series
LAT LON GRID
GREEN
TEXT INFORMATION
ON
WAYPOINTS
LARGE
WAYPOINT NAMES
ON
CHART BORDER LINES
ON
LANDMASS
BRT YELLOW
BACKGROUND
BLUE
NAVAIDS
ON
LIGHT SECTOR INFO
ON
OTHER SYMBOLS
WHITE
MARKS SIZE
LARGE
MODEL1722C series
CHART
DETAILS
CHART
DETAILS
EDIT
CNTOUR
LINE
RETURN
EDIT
CNTOUR
LINE
RETURN
Chart details menu
3. Use the cursor pad to select WAYPOINTS.
4. Press the EDIT soft key.
5. Use the cursor pad to select LARGE, SMALL or OFF.
LARGE: Shows mark in actual shape.
SMALL: Displays all waypoints with an “X” regardless of mark shape
selected.
OFF: Turns off all waypoints and their names. Waypoints which are part
of a route are always shown regardless of this setting.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or [ENTER] knob to register your selection.
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-36
3.8.5 Searching waypoints
You can search for a waypoint through the alphanumeric list as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES, WAYPOINTS and ALPHANUMERIC LIST
soft keys to show the alphanumeric list.
GOTO
NEW
WPT
EDIT
WPT
ERASE
WPT
RETURN
WPT
ALPHA
▲
▲
ABALONE
35°47.010'N
135°21.000'W
00:00 01JAN01
350.9
°
3.80 nm
CRAB
34°42.000'N
135°21.050'W
00:00 01JAN01
050.9°
1.98 nm
FISH
34°41.000'N
135°21.030'W
00:00 01JAN01
065.9°
1.83 nm
LOBSTER
38°44.300'N
135°21.010'W
00:00 01JAN01
144.9°
4.93nm
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
SEARCH FOR
---
Search window
Alphanumeric list
3. Use the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob to enter up to three alphanumeric
characters in the search window. Then, the waypoint searched appears at
the top of the screen.
4. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-37
3.9 Routes
Often a trip from one place to another involves several course changes,
requiring a series of route points (waypoints) which you navigate to, one after
another. The sequence of waypoints leading to the ultimate destination is called
a route. Your unit can automatically advance to the next waypoint on a route, so
you do not have to change the destination waypoint repeatedly.
You can store up to 200 routes, and a route may have 35 waypoints.
3.9.1 Creating routes
Entering a route with existing waypoints
This method constructs routes using existing waypoints.
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the ROUTES soft key to open the route menu. (No data will be shown
if there is no routes created.)
ROUTE
GOTO
NEW
ROUTE
EDIT
ROUTE
ERASE
ROUTE
RETURN
Number of waypoints
in route
Route name
Total length of route
▲
001
WAYPOINTS
35
LENGTH
25.6 nm
002
WAYPOINTS
2
LENGTH
56.7 nm
003
WAYPOINTS
3
LENGTH
21.1 nm
004
WAYPOINTS
3
LENGTH
21.1 nm
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
SEARCH FOR
---
Route menu
4. Press the NEW ROUTE soft key to open the new route entry screen.
ROUTE NAME
COMMENT
0 0 1
NEW
ROUTE
PLOT
LOCAL
LIST
ALPHA
LIST
CONECT
ROUTE
CANCEL
New route entry screen
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-38
5. If desired you can change the route name shown and/or add a comment. A
route name may consist of six characters; comment, 13 characters.
6. Press the LOCAL LIST or ALPHA LIST soft key to open the waypoint list.
7. Use the cursor pad to select a waypoint, and press the ADD WPT soft key to
add it to the route.
8. Repeat step 7 to complete the route.
Note: To clear a waypoint, press the ERASE LST WP soft key. Each
pressing of this key deletes the last waypoint entered.
9. Press the SAVE soft key to register the route.
10. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Entering a route with the cursor
This method allows you to construct a route directly on the plotter display, using
existing waypoints or new locations. Any new location will be saved as a
waypoint, under the youngest empty waypoint number.
1. Follow step 1-5 in “Entering a route from the route list” on the previous page.
2. Press the PLOT soft key to show the plotter display.
3. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on an existing waypoint (ADD
WPT soft key appears) or new location (ADD NEW WPT soft key appears).
4. Press the ADD WPT soft key (or ADD NEW WPT soft key).
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to complete the route.
6. Push the [ENTER] knob to register the route.
7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-39
Creating voyage-based routes
You can create routes based on your ship’s track, and each route may contain
35 points. The route can be created automatically (by time or distance), or
manually. This feature is useful when you wish to retrace previous track.
The “SAVE” icon appears at the top of the screen when a voyage-based route is
being created.
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the CREATE VOYAGE-BASED ROUTE soft key.
ROUTE
NEW
SELECT
ROUTE
RETURN
▲
001
WAYPOINTS
35
LENGTH
25.6 nm
002
WAYPOINTS
2
LENGTH
56.7 nm
003
WAYPOINTS
3
LENGTH
21.1 nm
004
WAYPOINTS
3
LENGTH
21.1 nm
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
SEARCH FOR
---
Save route menu
4. Press the NEW soft key to show the new route window.
Note: If you want to tack voyage-based points on an existing route, press
the SELECT ROUTE soft key instead of the NEW soft key, then enter
route number to use.
SAVE
ROUTE
BCKTRK
TIME
BCKTRK
DIST
MANUAL
CANCEL
Next consecutive route number
ROUTE NAME
0 0 6
COMMENT
USE FURUNO BACK TRACK FUNCTION
TO AUTOMATICALLY CREATE ROUTE
BY TIME OR DISTANCE.
Save route window
5. If required, you may change the route name and enter a comment.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-40
6. Choose how to record points for your route, by time, by distance or manual
entry pressing by one of BCKTRK TIME, BCKTRK RANGE or MANUAL soft
key as appropriate. For manual go to step 8. For BCKTRK TIME, BCKTRK
DIST one of the following displays appears.
TIME INTERVAL
00h01m
(When selecting BCKTRK TIME.)
DISTANCE INTERVAL
00.1nm
(When selecting BCKTRK DIST.)
Displays for entry of time, distance interval
7. Enter interval desired with the cursor pad and press the [ENTER] knob.
Press the START and RETURN soft keys followed by the [MENU] key to
close the menu. At this moment, voyage based route will be created.
8. For manual entry of waypoints, do the following:
a) Press the [SAVE/MOB] key momentarily to enter a waypoint mark at own
ship position. A new waypoint is created under the next consecutive
waypoint number and that waypoint is added to the route. (You may close
the SAVE ROUTE screen by pressing the RETURN soft by followed by
the MENU key.)
b) Repeat step a) as necessary. 35 waypoints may be entered.
To stop recording waypoints and save the route
You can stop recording waypoints and save the route at any time as shown in
the procedure below. When 35 waypoints have been entered the message “Total
35 WPTS have been already registered in the route. Stop creating voyage
based route.” is displayed. In this case, save the route as shown below.
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and CREATE
VOYAGE-BASED ROUTE soft keys.
2. Press the FINISH LOG soft key to stop recording waypoint and save the
route.
3. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-41
3.9.2 Connecting routes
Two routes which you have created can be connected as follows to form a new
route.
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the ROUTES soft key.
4. Press the NEW ROUTE soft key.
5. If desired, enter the name for the new route and enter comment.
6. Press the CONNECT soft key.
7. Use the cursor pad and the [ENTER] knob to enter the route name for the
first route, beneath FIRST in the CONNECT ROUTE window.
NEW
ROUTE
F < -- > R
SAVE
CANCEL
ROUTE NAME
COMMENT
0 0 1
CONNECT ROUTE
FIRST
SECOND
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
FORWARD FORWARD
Connect route window
8. If necessary press the F< - ->R soft key to select direction to follow the
waypoints of the route, forward or reverse.
9. Enter the route name of the second route as you did for the first route.
10. Press the SAVE soft key.
11. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Note: The maximum number of waypoints in a route is 35. If this number is
exceeded an error message appears. In this case, delete waypoints in one
or both routes so the total number of waypoints does not exceed 35.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-42
3.9.3 Inserting waypoints
Waypoints can be inserted into a route as follows:
Inserting waypoint from the route list
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the ROUTES soft key.
4. Use the cursor pad to select a route.
5. Press the EDIT ROUTE soft key. The route name screen appears.
6. Press the LOCAL LIST soft key.
EDIT
ROUTE
▲
INSERT
WPT
REMOVE
WPT
CHANGE
WPT
COORD
TYPE
RETURN
29.9°
12.0nm
159.9°
6.00nm
50.5°
29.8nm
359.9°
3.0nm
LEG
ROUTE NAME:
001
COMMENT:
01
34°44.111'N
135°21.134'W
001WPT
02
34°43.432'N
135°41.456'W
003WPT
03
34°14.124'N
135°21.567'W
002WPT
04
34°44.569'N
135°21.152'W
005WPT
05
34°54.124'N
135°21.888'W
008WPT
Edit route menu
7. Press ▲ or ▼ to place the cursor at the location where you want to insert a
waypoint.
8. Press the INSERT WPT or CHANGE WPT soft key as appropriate. The local
list appears.
001
34°44.111'N
135°21.134'W
001WPT
002
34°43.432'N
135°41.456'W
002WPT
003
34°14.124'N
135°21.567'W
003WPT
004
34°34.490'N
135°51.387'W
004WPT
LOCAL LIST
▲
Waypoint list for editing a route (local list)
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-43
9. Use the cursor pad to select the waypoint you want to insert. (You can switch
between the local list and alphanumeric list by using the LOCAL LIST and
ALPHA LIST soft keys.)
10. Press the SELECT WPT or CHANGE WPT soft key, whichever is displayed.
11. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Inserting a waypoint from the plotter display
Inserting a waypoint before first or last waypoint in a route
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the ROUTES soft key.
4. Use the cursor pad to select a route.
5. Press the EDIT ROUTE soft key.
6. Press the PLOT soft key to show the plotter screen.
7. Operate the cursor to place the cursor on the first (or last) waypoint of the
route. A flashing diamond appears when the waypoint is correctly selected.
8. Press the ADD TO START soft key or the ADD TO END soft key depending
on the waypoint you selected at step 7.
9. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on an existing waypoint (ADD
WPT soft key appears) or new location (ADD NEW WP soft key appears).
10. Press the ADD WPT soft key (ADD NEW WP soft key).
11. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Inserting a waypoint in an intermediate location on a route
1. Follow steps 1 through 6 in “Inserting a route waypoint before the first or last
waypoint in a route.”
2. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on a line connecting waypoints.
The SPLIT LEG soft key appears and the line flashes when the line is
correctly selected.
3. Press the SPLIT LEG soft key. The line changes from solid to dashed.
4. The INSERT NEW WP soft key appears. Dray the cursor to a new location or
select an existing waypoint, in which case the INSERT WPT key replaces the
INSERT NEW WP key.
5. Press the INSERT WPT soft key (INSERT NEW WP soft key).
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-44
3.9.4 Removing waypoints from a route
Removing a waypoint from the route list
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the ROUTES soft key.
4. Select a route.
5. Press the EDIT ROUTE and LOCAL LIST soft keys.
6. Select the waypoint you want to remove.
7. Press the REMOVE WPT soft key.
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Removing a waypoint from the plotter display
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the ROUTES soft key.
4. Select a route.
5. Press the EDIT ROUTE soft key.
6. Press the PLOT soft key to show the plot screen.
7. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on the waypoint you want to
remove from the route.
8. Press the REMOVE WPT soft key. The route is redrawn, eliminating the
waypoint erased.
9. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3.9.5 Erasing routes
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the ROUTES soft key.
4. Use the cursor pad to select a route.
5. Press the ERASE ROUTE soft key. You are asked if you are sure to erase
the route.
6. Push the [ENTER] knob to erase the route, or the [CLEAR] key to escape.
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-45
3.10 Navigation
This section shows you how to get to a desired destination by “quick points,”
waypoints, port services and routes.
Note: Reciprocal setting and canceling of destination is available by outputting
the data sentence ZDA from the NavNet unit connected to the navigator.
3.10.1 Navigating to a “quick point”
The “quick point” feature allows you to navigate to point(s) without retaining the
data indefinitely in your unit’s memory.
Selecting quick point entry method
You need to tell your unit how to set the quick point: 1POINT, 35POINTS (up to
35 points) or 35PTS/PORT SVC. (For how to navigate to points/port services
see “3.10.3 Navigating to ports, port services” on page 3-47.)
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the PLOTTER SETUP soft key.
3. Use the cursor pad to select SET GOTO METHOD and press the EDIT soft
key.
GOTO METHOD
1POINT
35POINTS
35PTS/PORT SVC
Goto method window
4. Use the cursor pad to select method desired.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Navigating to a single quick point
1. Place the cursor on an existing waypoint (GOTO WPT soft key appears) or a
new location (GOTO CURSOR soft key appears).
2. Select “1 POINT” following the procedure in the above paragraph.
3. Depending on the selection you made at step 1 press GOTO CURSOR or
GOTO WPT soft key.
A solid line (light-blue on the MODEL1722C series) with arrows connects
between own ship and destination, which is marked as “QP<01>” for
cursor-selected location or waypoint name in case of waypoint. Arrows on the
line show the direction to follow to get to the point. Range and bearing from own
ship to the destination appear at the top of screen. The quick point is saved to
the waypoint list as waypoint “QP01.”
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-46
Navigating to multiple quick points
1. Select “35 POINTS” following the procedure in “Selecting quick point entry
method” on the previous page.
2. Press the GOTO soft key.
3. Place the cursor on an existing waypoint (SELECT WPT soft key appears) or
a new location (ADD QP soft key appears).
4. Depending on the action taken at step 3 press the SELECT WPT or ADD QP
soft key. “QP<01>” appears at the cursor location if a quick point is selected.
To erase last-entered quick point (waypoint), press the ERASE LST QP
(ERASE LST WP) soft key.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to complete the route.
6. Push the [ENTER] knob to finish.
A solid line runs between own ship and first waypoint and a dashed line between
other waypoints. (For the MODEL1722C series, those lines are colored light-blue
and green, respectively.) Quick points are numbered in sequential order from
QP<01> and are saved to the waypoint list. Range and bearing from own ship to
the first destination appear at the top of screen. The quick points are saved as a
route, under the name “Q>RTE” (Quick Route).
3.10.2 Navigating to waypoints
Selecting waypoint from the plotter display
1. Operate the cursor pad to select a waypoint.
2. Press the GOTO WPT soft key.
Note: GOTO method should be selected to “1 POINT” on the PLOTTER SETUP
menu.
Selecting waypoint from the waypoint list
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the WAYPOINTS soft key to open the waypoint menu.
4. Press the LOCAL LIST or ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft key as desired.
5. Use the cursor pad to select a waypoint.
6. Press the GOTO soft key, and the plotter display appears.
For either of the above methods, a solid line (light-blue on the MODEL1722C
series) runs between waypoint selected and own ship’s position. Arrows on the
line show the direction to the follow to get to the waypoint. Waypoint data
appears at the top of screen.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-47
3.10.3 Navigating to ports, port services (NavCharts
™ only)
Some NavCharts™ have a port service list which shows services available at
ports or harbors. (See page 3-13.) You can use the list to set destination as
follows:
1. Select “35 PTS/PORT SVC” following the procedure in “Selecting quick point
entry method” on page 3-45.
2. Press the GOTO soft key. Then, soft key titles change as in the figure below.
FROM
OS
0.26 nm
180.2°M
PUNTA CORNACCHIA
ACCO AMENO
I. ISCHIA
CASAMICCIOLA
ISCHIA
PORTO
40°45.971'N
13°57.462'E
+
GOTO
QUICK
ROUTE
NEAR
SRVC
PORT
CANCEL
GOTO
16.0nm
Plotter display
3. Press the PORT or NEAR SRVC soft key depending on objective. PORT
shows a list of ports in your area. NEAR SRVC displays the port service list.
▼
PORT & SERVICE
ACCIAROLI
ACQUAMORTA
AGNONE S. NICOLA
AGROPOLI
AMALFI
BAIA
CAPRI
CASA MICCIOLA-ISCHIA
▲
Port services
Port list (Italy)
PORT & SERVICE
Port services and sample port list
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-48
4. If you selected PORT at step 3, use the cursor pad to select a port and
press the ENTER soft key. Make a route using the soft keys and push the
[ENTER] knob. (If you want to go directly to that port, simply press the ADD
QP soft key followed by the [ENTER] knob.)
If you selected NEAR SRVC at step 3, select service mark desired and
then push the ENTER soft key or [ENTER] knob. Then, the display shows
the locations of those services nearest you. (The figure below shows the
location of filling stations in an area in southern Italy.) Use the cursor pad to
place the “hand cursor” on the port service icon desired and press the
ENTER soft key. Make a route using the soft keys and push the [ENTER]
knob. (If you want to go directly to location selected, simply press the ADD
QP soft key followed by the [ENTER] knob.)
FROM
OS
0.26 nm
180.2°M
PUNTA CORNACCHIA
ACCO AMENO
I. ISCHIA
CASAMICCIOLA
ISCHIA
PORTO
40°45.971'N
13°57.462'E
+
GOTO
ENTER
CANCEL
GOTO
16.0nm
Sample filling station locations (southern Italy)
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-49
3.10.4 Following a route
Selecting the route to follow
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the ROUTES soft key to open the route list.
4. Select a route.
5. Press the GOTO soft key to show the plotter display. The cursor is on the
route waypoint nearest own ship.
WP-002
WP-001
FISH
CRAB
GOTO
ROUTE
FROM
OS
1.3 nm
208.5°M
WPT
RETURN
RVRSE
ROUTE
GOTO
WPT
FISH
16.0 nm
Plotter display, route selected as destination
6. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on the waypoint or leg in the route
from where to start navigating the route.
7. Press the GOTO WPT or FOLLOW LEG soft key, depending on the action
taken at step 6.
A solid line runs between own ship and the first route waypoint and all other
route waypoints are connected with a dashed line. (For the 1722C series, those
lines are colored light-blue and green, respectively.) The arrows on the lines
show the direction to traverse the route.
Navigating route waypoints in reverse order
Press the RVRSE ROUTE soft key to navigate waypoints in reverse order. The
arrows on the route line point in the direction selected.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-50
Restarting navigation
When you steer to avoid an obstacle or the vessel drifts, you may go off your
intended course, as in Line 1 in the figure below. Also, if you don’t need to return
to the original course, you can go directly to the next waypoint, as in Line 2 in
the figure below. In these cases, use the restart function to restart navigation.
Original course
Obstacle
Line 1
Line 2
Example of when to restart navigation
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the LOG soft key.
Estimated Time of Arrival at destination
Passed waypoint (green characters)
Destination waypoint (WPT name against bright background)
Replaces triangle
when selecting a
route leg.
LOG
RE-
START
STOP
RVRSE
SPEED
COORD
TYPE
Replaced by
"FOLLOW LEG"
when selecting
a route leg.
▲
29.9°
12.0nm
159.9°
6.00nm
50.5°
29.8nm
359.9°
3.0nm
LEG
01
34°44.111'N
135°21.134'W
001WPT
34°43.432'N
135°41.456'W
003WPT
03
34°14.124'N
135°21.567'W
002WPT
04
34°44.569'N
135°21.152'W
005WPT
05
34°54.124'N
135°21.888'W
008WPT
ETA 23:59 11.FEB
02
Log display
4. Use the cursor pad to select a waypoint or a route leg. When a route leg is
selected the single arrow cursor is replaced by double arrows.
5. Press the RESTART soft key, or FOLLOW LEG soft key in case of route leg.
Note: Navigation may be restarted from the plotter display, with the
RESTART key, when a single quick point (QP<01>) is selected for
navigation.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-51
Setting speed for ETA calculation
Speed, which may be input manually or automatically, is required to calculate
ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival) to a waypoint.
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the LOG soft key.
4. Press the SPEED soft key.
SPEED FOR ETA
▲
SPD 010.0kt
GPS AVG. SPEED
▼
Select speed for ETA window
5. Key in speed manually in the SPD field, or use GPS speed data (if
applicable) by selecting GPS AVG. SPEED.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or the [ENTER] knob to register your selection.
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Switching waypoints
When you arrive to a waypoint on a route, you can switch to the next waypoint
three ways: perpendicular to waypoint, arrival alarm circle and manual.
PERPENDICULAR: Automatically switches the TO waypoint when the boat
enters the arrival alarm range or the boat passes an imaginary perpendicular line
passing through the center of the destination waypoint.
ARRVL ALM CRCL: Automatically switches the TO waypoint when the boat
enters the arrival alarm range. For how to set the arrival alarm, see paragraph
3.11.2 Arrival alarm.
MANUAL: MANUAL: When the boat nears a destination waypoint, the
destination waypoint may be manually switched by using the RESTART soft key
(see page 3-50). This function is operative when “1 POINT” is selected as the
GOTO method (see page 3-45).
WPT 1
WPT 2
Perpendicular
Waypoint switched
at this point.
WPT 1
WPT 2
Waypoint switched
at this point.
Arrival Alarm Circle
How waypoints are switched in perpendicular and arrival alarm circle
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-52
To select waypoint switching method do the following:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the PLOTTER SETUP soft key.
3. Use the cursor pad to select WAYPOINT SWITCHING.
4. Press the EDIT soft key to show the waypoint switching window.
5. Use the cursor pad to select appropriate waypoint switching method;
PERPENDICULAR, ARRVL ALM CRCL (default setting), or MANUAL.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or [ENTER] knob.
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Canceling route navigation
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the LOG soft key.
4. Press the STOP soft key.
5. Push the [ENTER] knob.
6. Press the RELEASE soft key.
7. Push the [ENTER] knob.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-53
3.11 Alarms
When an alarm setting has been violated the buzzer sounds and the speaker
icon appears (in red on the 1722C series). Press the [CLEAR] key to silence the
alarm. You can see which alarm has been violated on the alarm menu display.
You may set up the plotter alarms on the ALARM menu, which may be displayed
by pressing the [ALARM] key. For 1722C series, note that the alarm icon is red
when an alarm setting is violated, and turns black when the [CLEAR] key or
CLEAR ALARM soft key is pressed. The color does not change when another
alarm is violated.
AUDIO ALARM
INTERNAL BUZZ
ARRIVAL ALARM
OFF 0.010nm
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM
OFF 0.010nm
PROXIMITY ALARM
OFF
XTE ALARM
OFF 0.050nm
SPEED ALARM
OFF
TRIP ALARM
OFF 0000.0nm
ALARM INFOMATION
NO ALARM
ALARM1
EDIT
NEXT
PAGE
RETURN
BOTTOM ALARM
OFF
TEMPERATURE ALARM
OFF
ALARM INFOMATION
NO ALARM
ALARM
2
EDIT
PREV..
PAGE
Page 1 Page 2
NEXT
PAGE
PREV.
PAGE
CLEAR
ALARM
Plotter alarm menu
3.11.1 Audio alarm on/off
Audio and visual alarms are released whenever an alarm setting is violated. You
can enable or disable the audio alarm as follows:
1. Press the [ALARM] key to show the alarm menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select AUDIO ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the audio alarm window.
AUDIO ALARM
INT & EXT BUZZ
INTERNAL BUZZ
OFF
Audio alarm window
4. Use the cursor pad to select INT & EXT BUZZ (Internal + External alarm),
INTERNAL BUZZ (Internal alarm) or OFF. This turns on or off the audio
alarm globally for all alarms, including radar.
5. Press the ENTER soft key followed by the [ALARM] key to close the menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-54
3.11.2 Arrival alarm
The arrival alarm informs you that your boat is approaching a destination
waypoint. The area that defines an arrival zone is that of a circle which you
approach from the outside of the circle. The alarm will be released if your boat
enters the circle. When the arrival alarm is active a dashed circle (red on the
MODEL1722C series) marks the arrival alarm area.
Note: Arrival alarm and anchor watch alarm cannot be set together.
: Alarm area
Own ship
Alarm
range
Destination
waypoint
How the arrival alarm works
1. Press the [ALARM] key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select ARRIVAL ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the arrival alarm window.
ARRIVAL ALARM
▲
ON 0.010nm
OFF
▼
Arrival alarm window
4. Use the cursor pad to select ON.
5. Use the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob to enter alarm range: Use ◄ or ► to
select digit; rotate the [ENTER] knob to set value. The available arrival alarm
range is 0.001 to 9.999 miles.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.
7. Press the [ALARM] key to close the menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-55
3.11.3 Anchor watch alarm
The anchor watch alarm informs you that your boat is moving when it should be
at rest. When the anchor watch is active, a dashed circle (red on the
MODEL1722C series) with an “X” at its center marks the anchor watch area.
Your ship's position where
you start the anchor watch
alarm.
Alarm
setting
: Alarm
area
How the anchor watch alarm works
1. Press the [ALARM] key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select ANCHOR WATCH ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to open the anchor alarm window.
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM
▲
ON 0.050nm
OFF
▼
Anchor watch alarm window
4. Use the cursor pad to select ON.
5. Use the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob to enter alarm range: Use ◄ or ► to
select digit; rotate the [ENTER] knob to set value. The available anchor
watch range is 0.001 to 9.999 miles.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.
7. Press the [ALARM] key to close the menu.
Note: If the arrival alarm range is changed, turn off the anchor watch alarm and
then turn it on again to give priority to the anchor watch alarm.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-56
3.11.4 XTE (Cross Track Error) alarm
The XTE alarm warns you when your boat is off its intended course. When the
XTE alarm is active two dashed lines (red on the MODEL1722C series) mark the
XTE alarm area.
: Alarm
Destination
waypoint
Own ship
position
Alarm
setting
Intended
course
How the XTE alarm works
1. Press the [ALARM] key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select XTE ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to open the XTE alarm window.
XTE ALARM
▲
ON 0.050nm
OFF
▼
XTE alarm window
4. Use the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob to enter alarm range: Use ◄ or ► to
select digit; rotate the [ENTER] knob to set value. The available XTE alarm
range is 0.001 to 9.999 miles.
5. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.
6. Press the [ALARM] key to close the menu.
3.11.5 Speed alarm
The speed alarm warns when your boat’s speed is within, over/under or under
the speed range set.
1. Press the [ALARM] key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select SPEED ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the speed alarm window.
SPEED ALARM
▲
WITHIN
000.0 ~ 000.0 kt
UNDER/OVER
000.0 ~ 000.0 kt
OFF
▼
Speed alarm window
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-57
4. Use the cursor pad to select WITHIN, OVER/UNDER, or OFF.
5. For WITHIN and OVER/UNDER, use the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob to
enter alarm range: Use ◄ or ► to select digit; rotate the [ENTER] knob to set
value.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.
7. Press the [ALARM] key to close the menu.
3.11.6 Proximity alarm
The proximity alarm alerts you when own ship nears a waypoint, which is
marked with the proximity mark, by the proximity alarm radius set for that
waypoint on the waypoint list. When own ship is within a waypoint’s proximity
alarm radius, the alarm sounds. The proximity mark remains on the screen until
the proximity alarm is turned off or the waypoint is erased. (Note that the
MODEL1722C series show the proximity mark and dashed circle in red.)
Radius in proportion to
proximity alarm radius,
which is set on waypoint list
001WPT
Proximity mark
1. Press the [ALARM] key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select PROXIMITY ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the proximity alarm window.
PROXIMITY ALARM
▲
ON
OFF
▼
Proximity alarm window
4. Use the cursor pad to select ON or OFF.
5. Press the ENTER soft key or [ENTER] knob.
6. Press the [ALARM] key to close the menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-58
3.11.7 Trip alarm
The trip alarm informs you when you traveled a certain distance.
1. Press the [ALARM] key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select TRIP ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the trip alarm window.
TRIP ALARM
▲
ON 0000.0nm
OFF
▼
Trip alarm window
4. Select ON with the cursor.
5. Use the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob to enter alarm range: Use ◄ or ► to
select digit; rotate the [ENTER] knob to set value.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.
7. Press the Press the [ALARM] key to close the menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-59
3.11.8 Alarm information
When an alarm setting has been violated the buzzer sounds and the speaker
icon appears (in red on the color model). Press the [CLEAR] key to silence the
alarm. You can see which alarm has been violated on the alarm menu display. In
the example below the arrival alarm has been violated.
1. Press the [ALARM] key. The name of the offending alarm appears in the
ALARM INFORMATION window.
AUDIO ALARM
INT & EXT BUZZ
ARRIVAL ALARM
ON 0.010nm
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM
OFF 0.010nm
PROXIMITY ALARM
OFF
XTE ALARM
OFF 0.050nm
SPEED ALARM
OFF
TRIP ALARM
OFF 0000.0nm
ALARM INFOMATION
ARRIVED
AT WAYPOINT.
ALARM1
EDIT
NEXT
INFO
CLEAR
ALARM
NEXT
PAGE
RETURN
Alarm information
window
Means multiple alarms
have been violated.
CONTINUE
Speaker icon
Alarm menu)
2. Press the CLEAR ALARM soft key to acknowledge the alarm (and silence
the alarm if it was not already silenced with the [CLEAR] key.) For the color
model, the speaker icon changes from red to background color. The icon
remains on the screen until the cause of the alarm is eliminated or the alarm
is disabled.
Note: If more than one alarm has been violated the message CONTINUE
appears at the bottom of the alarm information window. In this case
press the NEXT INFO soft key to see which other alarms have been
violated.
3. Press the [ALARM] key to close the alarm menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-60
Alarm messages
The table below shows the plotter alarm messages and their meanings
Plotter alarm messages and their meanings
Message Meaning
ARRIVED AT XXX WAYPOINT!
(XXX = waypoint number)
Arrival alarm violated.
ENTERED INTO AVOIDANCE
AREA!
Proximity alarm violated.
EXCEEDED ANCHOR WATCH
LIMIT!
Anchor watch alarm violated.
EXCEEDED XTE LIMIT! XTE alarm violated.
SPEED ALARM! Speed alarm violated.
TEMPERATURE ALARM! Water temperature alarm
violated.
TRIP ALARM! MILEAGE
EXCEEDED
Trip alarm violated.
3.12 Resetting Trip Distance
Trip distance is shown on the navigation data display. You can reset the trip
distance to zero as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION and GENERAL SETUP soft keys in
that order to show the GENERAL SETUP menu.
KEY BEEP
ON
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
RANGE UNIT
nm, kt
TEMPERATURE UNIT
F
DEPTH UNIT
ft
TEMPERATURE SOURCE
NMEA
DEPTH SOURCE
NMEA
RESET TRIP LOG
NO
▲
GENERAL
SETUP1
EDIT
NEXT
PAGE
RETURN
General setup menu, page 1
3. Use the cursor pad to select RESET TRIP LOG and press the EDIT soft key.
4. Use the cursor pad to select YES.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-61
3.13 Entering the MOB Mark, Setting MOB as
Destination
The MOB (Man Overboard) mark functions to mark man overboard position. You
can inscribe this mark from any mode, except while playing back data or
conducting a self-test. Note that this function requires position data.
Man
overboad
Range, bearing
Current
position
MOB
mark
MOB Data Box
Bearing and range
to MOB position
M
(MOB)
M
O
B
162.5°
0.49 nm
MOB concept
1. Press and hold down the [SAVE/MOB] key for about three seconds when
someone falls onboard. The display shows the waypoint number being saved
(youngest empty waypoint number, 001-999) followed by the MOB
confirmation window.
MAN OVER BOARD!
GO TO MOB?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
WAYPOINT SAVED!
XXXWPT
CONTINUE PUSHING
FOR MOB!
After
several
seconds
XXX = Waypoint number
MOB mark messages
2. Push the [ENTER] knob to select the MOB position as the destination, or
press the [CLEAR] key to only mark current ship’s position as a waypoint. If
you select the MOB position as destination;
•
A full-screen radar, plotter or overlay (color model only) appears depending on
the display in use.
•
The MOB mark “MOB” appears at the MOB position and a line runs between it
and current position. This line shows the shortest course to the MOB position.
•
Range and bearing to the MOB position are shown in the MOB data box.
To erase an MOB mark from the plotter display, you must first erase its
corresponding waypoint. Place the cursor on the MOB mark, then press the
[CLEAR] key followed by pushing the [ENTER] knob to erase the waypoint. Then,
repeat to erase the MOB mark..
4-1
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
With connection of the optional network sounder you can show video sounder
images on the display.
4.1 Principle of Operation
The video sounder determines the distance between its transducer and
underwater objects such as fish, lake bottom or seabed and displays the results
on screen. It does this by utilizing the fact that an ultrasonic wave transmitted
through water travels at a nearly constant speed of 4800 feet (1500 meters) per
second. When a sound wave strikes an underwater object such as fish or sea
bottom, part of the sound wave is reflected back toward the source (transducer).
Thus by calculating the time difference between the transmission of a sound
wave and the reception of the reflected sound wave, the depth to the object can
be determined.
The entire process begins in the network sounder. Transmitter power is sent to
the transducer as a short pulse of electrical energy. The electrical signal
produced by the transmitter is converted into an ultrasonic signal by the
transducer and transmitted into the water. Any returning signals from intervening
objects (such as a fish school) are received by the transducer and converted into
an electrical signal. The signals are then amplified in the amplifier section, and
finally, displayed on screen.
The picture displayed is made up of a series of vertical scan lines, one for each
transmission. Each line represents a snapshot of what has occurred beneath the
boat. A series of snapshots are accumulated side by side across the screen, and
the resulting contours of the bottom and fish between the bottom and surface
are displayed.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0
50
100
Underwater conditions and video sounder display
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-2
4.2 Sounder Displays
4.2.1 Selecting a sounder display
There are seven display modes from which to choose: dual frequency, single
frequency, marker zoom, bottom zoom, bottom lock, bottom discrimination, and
A-scope
To select a display;
1. Press the [DISP] key and select a sounder display.
2. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the sounder soft keys.
3. Press the DISPLY MODE soft key to show the display mode window.
DISPLAY MODE
DUAL FREQ
SINGLE FREQ
MARKER ZOOM
BOTTOM ZOOM
BOTTOM LOCK
BOTTOM DSCRM
Display mode window
4. Use the cursor pad
to select a display.
5. Press the RETURN soft key to close the window.
Note: On menus which show the RETURN soft key you may use it or the
ENTER knob to register setting and close the window.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-3
4.2.2 Description of sounder displays
Single frequency display
Color bar
Soft keys
Variable Range Marker (white)
Depth scale
Tx frequency
Depth
Temp.
scale
(orange)
Water
temp.
graph
Water
temp.
display
114
52
Minute marker
Icons
(alarm, battery,
simulation)
Bottom echo
Zero line
Fish
echo
50k
SHIFT
AUTO/
D. BOX
DISPLY
MODE
FREQ
50 /200
50
30
F
40
SOUNDER
SINGLE
Display mode
0
50
100
150
200
Cross-hair
cursor
0'30"
Time
S
I
M
Indications on the single frequency display
Note 1: The water temperature display requires an appropriate water
temperature sensor. It can be turned on or off with TEMPERATURE
GRAPH on the SOUNDER menu.
Note 2: When using the vertically split plotter/sounder display with dual
frequency or zoom display, the depth scale is not displayed. Further, a
last digit on the depth may be overlapped by the line which splits
screens.
Selecting transmission frequency
The single frequency display shows either the 50 kHz picture or 200 kHz picture.
To select transmission frequency, press the FREQ 50/200 soft key to select “50”
or “200”.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-4
Dual-frequency display
The dual-frequency display provides both 50 kHz and 200 kHz pictures. This
display is useful for comparing the same picture with two different sounding
frequencies.
0.0
50k
200k
Dual-frequency display
50 kHz picture
The sounder uses ultrasonic pulses to detect bottom conditions. The lower the
frequency of the pulse, the wider the detection area. Therefore, the 50 kHz
frequency is useful for general detection and judging bottom condition.
200 kHz picture
The higher the frequency of the ultrasonic pulse the better the resolution.
Therefore, the 200 kHz frequency is ideal for detailed observation of fish school.
50 kHz
200 kHz
Sounding area and transmission frequency
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-5
Marker-zoom display
The marker-zoom display expands a selected area of the normal sounder picture
to full vertical size of the screen on the left-half window. You may specify the
portion to expand by operating the VRM (Variable Range Marker), which you can
shift with the [ENTER] knob. The area between the VRM and zoom marker is
expanded. The length of the segment is equal to one division of the depth scale.
200k
80
42.0
MARKER-ZOOM
DISPLAY
Fish school
Fish
school
This part
is zoomed.
Zoom marker
VRM
(White on color model)
NORMAL
DISPLAY
50
0
100
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
42
44
46
48
50
-
-
-
-
-
0'20"
Marker-zoom display plus normal sounder display
Note: The zoom marker is turned off in the default setting. You can turn it on with
ZOOM MARKER on the SOUNDER menu.
Bottom-zoom display
The bottom-zoom display expands bottom and bottom fish echoes by the zoom
range selected on the sounder range setup menu (see paragraph 5.9.3), and is
useful for determining bottom hardness. A bottom displayed with a short echo tail
usually means it is a soft, sandy bottom. A long echo tail means a hard bottom.
Note: The zoom marker is turned off in the default setting. You can turn it on with
ZOOM MARKER on the SOUNDER menu.
200k
20.0
Bottom
NORMAL DISPLAY
Zoom marker
BOTTOM-ZOOM
DISPLAY
80
50
0
100
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
50
40
60
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Bottom-zoom display plus normal sounder display
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-6
Bottom-lock display
The bottom-lock display provides a compressed normal picture on the right half
of the screen and a 3 or 6 meter (10 or 20 feet) wide layer in contact with the
bottom is expanded onto the left half of the screen. This mode is useful for
discriminating bottom fish from the bottom echo. You may select the bottom lock
range from the SOUNDER RANGE SETUP menu. For details, see paragraph
5.9.3.
200k
80
This part
is zoomed.
Fish
school
Zoom marke
r
NORMAL DISPLAYBOTTOM-LOCK
DISPLAY
50
0
100
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
10
20
15
60
10
5
-
-
-
-
-
Bottom-lock display plus normal sounder display
Bottom discrimination display
The bottom discrimination mode displays the bottom echo to help you determine
bottom hardness. A bottom displayed with a short echo tail usually means it is a
soft, sandy bottom. A long echo tail means a hard bottom.
20.0
NORMAL DISPLAYBOTTOM
DISCRIMINATION
DISPLAY
200k
0
80
2
4
50
0
100
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
50
-
Zoom marker
Long tail=Hard bottom
Short tail=Soft bottom
Bottom trail
Bottom discrimination display
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-7
A-scope display (display only)
The A-scope display, available in all modes, shows echoes at each transmission
with amplitudes and tone proportional to their intensities, on the right 1/3 of the
screen. It is useful for estimating fish species and seabed composition. To turn
on the A-scope display, press the DISPLAY MODE soft key, select display mode
desired, then press the A-SCPE soft key to turn the A-scope display on or off as
appropriate. For the mode except SINGLE MODE the screen must be split
horizontally to show the A-scope presentation.
SINGLE FREQ DISPLAY A-SCOPE
DISPLAY
200k
50
0
100
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
84
Strong echo (bottom)
A-scope Display
Weak echo (fish)
No response
-
-
A-scope display
4.2.3 Selecting screen split method in combination displays
On combination sounder displays you can split the screen vertically or
horizontally, using the SPLIT soft key as below.
0.0
50k
200k
0.0
50k
200k
SPLIT
/
SPLIT
/
How to use the SPLIT soft key (example: dual frequency display)
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-8
4.3 Automatic Sounder Operation
Automatic sounder operation is useful when you are preoccupied with other
tasks and do not have the time to adjust the display.
4.3.1 How the automatic sounder works
The automatic sounder function automatically selects the proper gain, range
scale and clutter suppression level according to depth. It works as follows:
• Range changes automatically to locate the bottom on the lower half of screen.
The range jumps to one step shallower range when bottom echoes reach a
half way point of the full scale from top and to one step deeper range when
they come to the lower edge of the scale.
• The gain is automatically adjusted to display the bottom echo in reddish brown
(default color arrangement).
• Clutter, which suppresses low level noise, is automatically adjusted.
4.3.2 Types of automatic sounder modes
Two types of automatic sounder modes are available: CRUISING and FISHING.
CRUISING is for tracking the bottom, and FISHING is for searching fish schools.
CRUISING uses a higher clutter rejection setting than FISHING therefore it is not
recommended for fish detection - weak fish echoes may be erased by the clutter
suppression circuit.
4.3.3 How to enable automatic sounder operation
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the sounder soft keys.
2. Press the AUTO/D. BOX soft key.
AUTO MODE
▲
CRUISING
FISHING
OFF (MANUAL)
▼
Mode/frequency window
3. Use the cursor pad
to select CRUISING or FISHING as appropriate.
4. Press the RETURN soft key to close the window.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-9
4.4 Manual Sounder Operation
Manual operation is useful for observing fish schools and bottom using fixed gain
setting.
The gain, range and range shifting functions used together give you the means
to select the depth you can see on screen. The basic range can be thought of as
providing a “window” into the water column and range shifting as moving the
“window” to the desired depth.
4.4.1 Selecting the manual mode
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the sounder soft keys.
2. Press the AUTO/D. BOX soft key to show the mode/frequency window.
3. Select OFF (MANUAL).
4. Press the RETURN soft key.
4.4.2 Selecting display range
Press the [RANGE +] or [RANGE -] key to select a range. The default ranges in
feet, meters, fathoms and passi/braza are as below. Note that range cannot be
changed in the automatic sounder mode.
Default sounder ranges
Range 1 Range 2 Range 3 Range 4 Range 5 Range 6 Range 7 Range 8
15 ft 30 ft 60 ft 120 ft 200 ft 400 ft 1000 ft 4000 ft
5 m 10 m 20 m 40 m 80 m 150 m 300 m 1200m
3 fa 5 fa 10 fa 20 fa 40 fa 80 fa 150 fa 650 fa
3 PB 5 PB 10 PB 30 PB 50 PB 100 PB 200 PB 700 PB
4.4.3 Adjusting the gain
Normally, set the gain to the point where excessive noise does not appear on
screen. Use a higher gain setting for greater depths and a lower setting for
shallow waters.
Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low
Examples of proper and improper gain
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-10
Press the [GAIN] key to show the gain window, and rotate the [ENTER] knob to
set the gain. Current level is shown on the bar. Press the RETURN key to finish.
The setting range is 0-100 (%).
GAIN 200kHz
27
▲
HIGH
LOW
▼
Gain window
Note 1: On the dual-frequency display, the gain can be independently set for 50
kHz and 200 kHz. Use the FREQ 50/200 soft key to select the
frequency for which to adjust gain.
Note 2: Gain cannot be adjusted in the automatic sounder mode. The message
“SOUNDER GAIN CANNOT BE CHANGED IN AUTO MODE” is
displayed when you attempt to do so.
4.4.4 Range shifting
The basic range may be shifted up or down as desired by pressing the SHIFT
soft key followed by adjusting the [ENTER] knob or ▲ or ▼ on the cursor pad.
Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
Shift
Shift concept
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-11
4.5 Measuring Depth, Time
The VRM functions to measure the depth, and the time cursor measures time.
1. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to shift the VRM; counterclockwise the shift it
downward, clockwise to shift it upward. You may also use the cursor pad to
shift the VRM, in which case use ▲ or ▼.
2. Use ◄ or ► on the cursor pad to shift the cross-hair cursor to measure time.
Depth to VRM
Cross-hair
cursor
84
50k
50
0
100
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
28.8
0'33"
Time to cursor intersection
(Max. 99'59")
VRM
How to use the VRM, time cursor
Note: If, when the range setting is over 1000 ft (m, fa, p/b), the VRM indication
and depth scale may overlap one another, shift the cross-hair cursor
slightly to show them completely. Further, when the display is shifted, the
depth scale may obscure the time indication.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-12
4.6 Reducing Interference
Interference from other acoustic equipment operating nearby or other electronic
equipment on your boat may show itself on the display as shown below.
Interference from Electrical inteference
other sounder
Types of interference
To reduce interference, do the following:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select NOISE LIMITER and press the EDIT soft key to show the noise limiter
window.
NOISE LIMITER
▲
OFF
LOW
MEDIUM
HIGH
▼
Noise limiter window
4. Use the cursor pad
to select degree of suppression desired (LOW, MEDIUM,
HIGH) or turn the noise limiter off.
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Turn the noise limiter function off when no interference exists, otherwise weak
echoes may be missed.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-13
4.7 Reducing Low Level Noise
Dots (light-blue on the color model) may appear over most of the screen. This is
mainly due to sediment in the water or noise. This noise can be suppressed by
adjusting CLUTTER on the SOIUNDER menu.
Appearance of clutter
When the sounder mode is Auto, the clutter suppression setting is fixed at AUTO.
To reduce low level noise in manual sounder operation do the following:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select CLUTTER and press the EDIT soft key to show the clutter window.
CLUTTER
▲
00
▼
Clutter window
4. Use the cursor pad
to select clutter rejection level desired; 0 (OFF) through
16, default setting, 9. The higher the number the higher the degree of
suppression. Note that the clutter suppressor may erase weak echoes.
Therefore, turn off the clutter when its use is not required.
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Note: Unlike the signal level feature, clutter does not erase echoes. However, if
you do not wish to change the relation between weak and strong echoes,
use signal level instead.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-14
4.8 Erasing Weak Echoes
Sediment in the water or reflections from plankton may be painted on the display
in green or light blue (color display) or “spots” on the background (monochrome
display). These weak echoes may be erased as below.
Weak
echoes
Appearance of weak echoes
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select SIGNAL LEVEL, and press the EDIT soft key to show the signal level
window.
SIGNAL LEVEL
▲
OFF
SL1
SL2
SL3
SL4
SL5
SL6
▼
SIGNAL LEVEL
▲
OFF
SL1
SL2
SL3
▼
16-color display
8-color display Monochrome display
SIGNAL LEVEL
▲
OFF
SL1
SL2
▼
Signal level window
4. Use the cursor pad
to select level of erasure or OFF as appropriate. The
higher the number the stronger the echo that will be erased.
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Note: Unlike “clutter,” signal level erases echoes. Therefore if you do not wish to
erase echoes use clutter instead.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-15
4.9 White Marker (MODEL1722C series)
The white marker functions to display a particular echo color in white. For
example, you may want to display the bottom echo in white to discriminate fish
echoes near the bottom. Note that the bottom must be displayed in
reddish-brown (color in default hue setting) for the white marker to function.
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select WHITE MARKER, and press the EDIT soft key to open the white
marker window.
WHITE MARKER
▲
0
▼
White marker window
4. Use the cursor pad
to select color to display in white. As you use the cursor
pad, the number (corresponds to echo number) in the marker window
changes, the white marker on the echo strength bar shifts and selected echo
color is displayed in white.
←
White marker shows
color currently
displayed in white.
Echo strength bar (16 color) when white marker function is active
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.
To turn the white marker function off, display “OFF” in the white marker window.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-16
4.10 Picture Advance Speed
The picture advance speed determines how quickly the vertical scan lines run
across the screen. When selecting a picture advance speed, keep in mind that a
fast advance speed will expand the size of the fish school horizontally on the
screen and a slow advance speed will contract it.
The advancement speed may be set independent of ship’s speed or
synchronized with ship’s speed.
4.10.1 Advancement independent of ship’s speed
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select PICTURE ADVANCE, and press the EDIT soft key to open the picture
advance window.
PICTURE ADVANCE
▲
2/1
1/1
1/2
1/4
1/8
1/16
STOP
▼
Picture advance window
The fractions in the window denote the number of scan lines produced per
transmission. For example, 1/8 means one scan line is produced every eight
transmissions. STOP freezes the display and it is convenient for observing
an echo.
4. Use the cursor pad
to select speed desired.
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Note: Advancement of the sounder picture may be temporarily interrupted while
the plotter display is shifted or its display range is changed when using the
plotter/sounder combination display.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-17
4.10.2 Advancement synchronized with ship’s speed
With speed data provided by a speed measuring device, picture advance speed
may be automatically synchronized with ship’s speed. As shown in the figure
below the horizontal scale of the display is not influenced with the speed
dependent picture advance mode active, thus it permits judgement of fish school
size and abundance at any speed. With the advancement synchronized with
ship’s speed the picture advance speed setting (on the previous page) is
ignored.
FULL
SPEED
HALF
SPEED
Actual Movement
Same size
fish schools
Speed
Normal Mode
Speed-Dependent Picture Advance Mode
Fish school shrinks as speed
is increased; expanded
as speed is decreased.
Fish schools are shown
same size regardless
of ship’s speed.
How the speed-dependent picture advance mode works
Activating/deactivating the speed-dependent picture advance mode
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
2. Select SPD SENSING PIC ADV.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to open the setting window.
4. Use the cursor pad
to select ON or OFF (default setting) as appropriate.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Note: Use the same speed data sentence (STG or STW) throughout the network
for smooth advancement of the sounder picture.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-18
4.11 Display Colors (MODEL1722C series)
You can select the number of colors and background color to display as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select HUE, and then press the EDIT soft key to show the hue window.
HUE
▲
1
▼
Hue window
4. Use the cursor pad
to select hue number, referring to the table below. (You
can see the result of your selection on the display.)
Hue no. and background and echo colors
Hue No. Echo Color Background Color
1 16 color Blue
2 8 color Blue
3 16 color Dark blue
4 8 color Dark blue
5 16 color White
6 8 color White
7 16 color Black
8 8 color Black
9 Monochrome, eight intensities
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-19
4.12 Alarms
The sounder section has five conditions which generate visual and aural alarms:
bottom alarm, fish alarm (bottom lock), fish alarm (normal), water temperature
alarm (temperature sensor required), and speed alarm. For 1722C series, note
that the alarm icon is red when an alarm setting is violated, and changes to
background color when the [CLEAR] key or CLEAR ALARM soft key is pressed.
The color does not change when another alarm is violated.
You may set up the sounder alarms on the ALARM menu, which may be
displayed by pressing the [ALARM] key.
AUDIO ALARM
INTERNAL BUZZ
BOTTOM ALARM
OFF
TEMPERATURE ALARM
OFF
FISH ALARM
OFF
FISH ALARM (B/L)
OFF
ALARM INFOMATION
NO ALARM
SOUNDER
ALARM
EDIT
CLEAR
ALARM
RETURN
Sounder alarm menu
4.12.1 Audio alarm on/off
The audio alarm sounds whenever an alarm setting is violated. You can enable
or disable the audio alarm as follows:
1. Press the [ALARM] key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the cursor pad
to select AUDIO ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the audio alarm window.
AUDIO ALARM
INT & EXT BUZZ
INTERNAL BUZZ
OFF
Audio alarm window
4. Use the cursor pad
to select INT & EXT BUZZ (Internal + External alarm),
INTERNAL BUZZ (Internal alarm) or OFF. This turns on or off the audio alarm
for all modes globally, including radar.
5. Press the [ALARM] key to finish.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-20
4.12.2 Bottom alarm
The bottom alarm sounds when the bottom echo is within the alarm range set.
To activate the bottom alarm the depth must be displayed. Note that the bottom
alarm is turned on or off reciprocally with the bottom alarm on the plotter alarm
menu.
1. Press the [ALARM] key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the cursor pad
to select BOTTOM ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the bottom alarm window.
BOTTOM ALARM
▲
ON
0000.0-0000.0 ft
OFF
▼
Bottom alarm window
4. Use the cursor pad to select ON or OFF as appropriate. For ON, enter alarm
range with the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob: Use ◄ or ► to select digit;
rotate the [ENTER] knob to set value.
5. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.
6. Press the [ALARM] key to finish.
4.12.3 Fish alarm
The fish alarm sounds when a fish echo is within the preset alarm range. Note
that the sensitivity of the fish alarm can be set on the SOUNDER SYSTEM
SETUP menu.
1. Press the [ALARM] key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the cursor pad
to select FISH ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the fish alarm window.
FISH ALARM
▲
ON
0000.0-0000.0 ft
OFF
▼
Fish alarm window
4. Use the cursor pad to select ON or OFF as appropriate. For ON, use the
cursor pad and [ENTER] knob to enter alarm range: Use ◄ or ► to select
digit; rotate the [ENTER] knob to set value.
5. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.
6. Press the [ALARM] key to finish.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-21
4.12.4 Fish alarm (B/L)
The bottom-lock fish alarm sounds when a fish echo is within a predetermined
distance from the bottom. Note that the sensitivity of the fish alarm can be set on
the SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP menu.
1. Press the [ALARM] key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the cursor pad
to select FISH ALARM (B/L).
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the fish alarm (B/L) window.
FISH ALARM (B/L)
▲
ON
0000.0-0000.0 ft
OFF
▼
Fish alarm (B/L) window
4. Use the cursor pad
to select ON or OFF as appropriate. For ON, use the
cursor pad and [ENTER] knob to enter alarm range: Use ◄ or ► to select
digit; rotate the [ENTER] knob to set value.
5. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.
6. Press the [ALARM] key to finish.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-22
4.12.5 Water temperature alarm
There are two types of water temperature alarms: WITHIN RANGE and OUT OF
RANGE. The WITHIN RANGE alarm sounds when the water temperature is
within the range set, the OUT OF RANGE alarm sounds when the water
temperature is higher or lower than the range set. This alarm requires water
temperature data.
Note that the water temperature alarm is turned on or off reciprocally with the
water temperature alarm on the plotter alarm menu.
1. Press the [ALARM] key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the cursor pad
to select TEMPERATURE ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the temperature alarm window.
TEMPERATURE ALARM
▲
WITHIN RANGE
-000.0 - +000.0°F
OUT OF RANGE
-000.0 - +000.0°F
OFF
▼
Water temperature alarm window
4. Use the cursor pad to select WITHIN RANGE, OUT OF RANGE or OFF as
appropriate. For WITHIN RANGE and OUT OF RANGE, use the cursor pad
and [ENTER] knob to enter alarm range: Use ◄ or ► to select digit; rotate
the [ENTER] knob to set value.
5. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.
6. Press the [ALARM] key to finish.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-23
4.12.6 When an alarm setting is violated...
When an alarm setting has been violated the buzzer sounds and the speaker
icon appears (in red on the color model). Press the [CLEAR] key to silence the
alarm. You can see which alarm has been violated on the alarm menu display. In
the example below the arrival alarm has been violated.
To see which alarm(s) has been violated;
1. Press the [ALARM] key. The offending alarm is shown in the ALARM
INFORMATION window.
Alarm information
window
Speaker icon
AUDIO ALARM
INTERNAL BUZZ
BOTTOM ALARM
OFF
TEMPERATURE ALARM
OFF
FISH ALARM
0164.0-0328.1ft
FISH ALARM (B/L)
OFF
ALARM INFOMATION
FISH ALARM!
SOUNDER
ALARM
EDIT
CLEAR
ALARM
RETURN
Sounder alarm menu
2. Press the CLEAR ALARM soft key to acknowledge the alarm (and silence the
buzzer if it was not already silenced with the [CLEAR] key.) For the color
model, the speaker icon changes from red to background color on the color
model and changes to normal video on the monochrome model. The speaker
icon remains on the screen until the reason for the alarm is eliminated.
Note: If more than one alarm has been violated the message CONTINUE
appears at the bottom of the alarm information window. In this case
press the NEXT INFO soft key to see which other alarms have been
violated.
3. Press the [ALARM] key to finish.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-24
Alarm messages
The table below shows the sounder alarm messages and their meanings
Sounder alarm messages and their meanings
Message Meaning
DEPTH ALARM! Bottom alarm violated.
FISH ALARM! Fish alarm violated.
TEMPERATURE ALARM! Water temperature alarm violated.
4.13 Water Temperature Graph
The water temperature graph (appropriate sensor required) plots water
temperature on the sounder display. (See the figure on page 4-3.) It can be
turned on or off as below.
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select TEMPERATURE GRAPH and press the EDIT soft key.
4. Select OFF (default setting) or ON as appropriate.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-25
Intensity difference
in water depth
Second bottom
echo
Rock base
Mud and sand
4.14 Interpreting the Sounder Display
4.14.1 Zero line
The zero line (sometimes referred to as the transmission line) represents the
transducer’s position, and moves off the screen when a deep phased range is
used.
Zero line
Shift
Zero line
4.14.2 Bottom echo
Echoes from the bottom are normally the strongest and are displayed in
reddish-brown (color model) or darkest tone (monochrome model) but the color
(tone on the monochrome model) and width will vary with bottom composition,
water depth, frequency, sensitivity, etc.
In a comparatively shallow depth, a high gain setting will cause a second or
sometimes a third or a fourth echo to be displayed at the same interval between
them below the first echo trace. This is because the echo travels between the
bottom and the surface twice or more in shallow depths.
The color (tone for monochrome model) of the bottom echo can be used to help
determine the density of the bottom materials (soft or hard). The harder the
bottom, the wider the trace. If the gain is set to show only a single bottom echo
on mud, a rocky bottom will show a second or third bottom return. The range
should be chosen so the first and second bottom echoes are displayed when
bottom hardness is being determined.
Bottom echoes
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-26
4.14.3 Fish school echoes
Fish school echoes will generally be plotted between the zero line and the
bottom. Usually the fish school/fish echo is weaker than the bottom echo
because its reflection property is much smaller compared to the bottom. The size
of the fish school can be ascertained from the density of the display.
Size of
fish school
Small
school
Large
school
Fish school echoes
4.14.4 Surface noise/Aeration
When the waters are rough or the boat passes over a wake, surface noise may
appear near the zero line. As surface turbulence is acoustically equivalent to
running into a brick wall, the bottom echo will be displayed intermittently. Similar
noise sometimes appears when a water temperature difference (thermocline)
exists. Different species of fish tend to prefer different temperature zones, so the
thermocline may be useful to help identify target fish. 200 kHz tends to show
shallow thermoclines better than 50 kHz.
In rough waters the display is occasionally interrupted due to below-the-ship air
bubbles obstructing the sound path. This also occurs when the boat makes a
quick turn or reverses movement. Lowering the picture advance speed may
reduce the interruption. However, reconsideration of the transducer installation
may be necessary if the interruption occurs frequently.
Surface noise
Caused by aerated
water
Thermocline
Surface noise/aeration
5-1
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
This chapter describes the various options which allow you to set up your unit to
suit your needs. For mode specific menus, e.g. radar plotter and sounder, make
sure that you select the appropriate display when making changes or viewing
menu option.
5.1 General Setup
This paragraph shows you how to set up functions common to the plotter, radar
and sounder displays. This is done on the GENERAL SETUP menu, which you
may display from any mode. These items include data, position and time formats,
units of measurement, data sources, etc.
1. Show the any display and press the [MENU] key to display the main menu.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the GENERAL SETUP soft key.
GENERAL
SETUP 1
KEY BEEP
ON
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
RANGE UNIT
nm, kt
TEMPERATURE UNIT
°C
DEPTH UNIT
ft
TEMPERATURE SOURCE
NMEA
DEPTH SOURCE
NMEA
RESET TRIP LOG
NO
▲
Page 1
NEXT
PAGE
EDIT
RETURN
LAT/LON DISPLAY
DD° MM.MMM'
TD DISPLAY
LORAN C
SPEED
SOG
POSITION DISPLAY
LAT/LON
TIME DISPLAY
24 HOURS
INFRARED REMOTE MODE
A
RANGE & BEARING MODE
RHUMB LINE
BEARING READOUT
MAGNETIC
MAGNETIC VARIATION
AUTO 7.0° W
DISPLAY MODE*
DAY
▲
GENERAL
SETUP 2
EDIT
PREV.
PAGE
Page 2 (MODEL1722 series)
*
*: MODEL1722 series only
General setup menu
4. Press the NEXT PAGE or PREV. PAGE soft key to switch pages if
necessary.
5. Use the cursor pad to select item.
6. Press the EDIT soft key.
7. Use the cursor pad to select option desired and press the ENTER soft key or
[ENTER] knob.
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-2
Contents of general menu
Item Description Settings Default Setting
Key Beep Turns key operation beep on/off. On, Off On
Language Chooses menu language. English, French, German,
Italian, Portuguese, Spanish
English
Range Unit Chooses unit of range and speed
measurement.
nm, kt; km, km/h; sm, mph;
nm & yd, kt; nm & m, kt; km
& m, km/h; sm & yd, mph
nm, kt
Temperature
Unit
Chooses unit of water temperature
measurement.
°C, °F °F
Depth Unit Chooses unit of depth measurement. ft, m, fa, PB (Passi/Braza) ft
Temperature
Source
Chooses source of water temperature data. ETR (network sounder),
NMEA
NMEA
Depth Source Chooses source of depth data. ETR, NMEA. NMEA
Reset Trip Log Resets distance run. Yes, No No
Lat/Lon Display Chooses how many digits (or seconds) to
display after decimal point in latitude and
longitude position.
DD°MM.MM’,
DD°MM.MMM’,
DD
°MM.MMMM’,
DD
°MM’SS.S”
DD
°MM.MMMM’
TD Display Chooses TD type. Loran C, Decca Loran C
Speed Chooses speed format to display. SOG (Speed over ground),
STW (Speed through water)
SOG
Position Display Chooses position display format. LAT/LON, TD LAT/LON
Time Display Chooses time notation. 12 hours, 24 hours 24 hours
Infrared
Remote Mode
A remote controller can be set
exclusively for use with a specific
display unit, in the case of multiple
NavNet display units. For further details
see the Installation Manual.
A, B, C, D A
Range &
Bearing Mode
Chooses how to calculate range and bearing.
Rhumb Line: Straight line
drawn between two points
on a nautical chart.
Great Circle: Shortest course
between two points on the
surface of the earth.
Rhumb Line
Bearing
Readout
Chooses bearing display format for course,
course over ground and cursor bearing.
True, Magnetic
Magnetic
Magnetic
Variation
The magnetic variations for all areas of the
earth are preprogrammed into this unit. The
preprogrammed variation is accurate for most
instances, however you may wish to manually
enter a variation. For manual input, select
Manual, hit the EDIT soft key, enter value and
hit the ENTER soft key to finish. “AUTO”
requires position data.
Auto, Manual
Auto
Display Mode
(Monochrome
model)
Reverses background (black) and foreground
(white) colors.
Day, Night Day
*Select ETR to show water temperature/depth data fed from the network sounder, and then set the TEMP
and DEPTH CALIBRATION of the SENSOR SETUP in the SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP menu.
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-3
5.2 Radar Setup
This paragraph explains how to customize the radar display to suit your
operational needs. Be sure to show the radar display before executing any of the
procedures.
5.2.1 Radar display setup
The radar display may be set up from the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu,
which contains items such as EBL reference and cursor position format.
1. Show the radar display, and press the [MENU] key to show the main menu.
2. Press the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.
EBL REFERENCE
RELATIVE
CURSOR POSITION
RNG & BRG-REL
TUNING
AUTO
TX SECTOR BLANKING
OFF
NOISE REJECTION
OFF
BACKGROUND COLOR
BLACK
ECHO COLOR
YELLOW
WATCHMAN TIME
5 min
RANGE UNIT
nm
▲
DISPLAY
SETUP
EDIT
DATA
BOX
EBL REFERENCE
RELATIVE
CURSOR POSITION
RNG & BRG-REL
TUNING
AUTO
TX SECTOR BLANKING
OFF
NOISE REJECTION
OFF
WATCHMAN TIME
OFF
RANGE UNIT
nm
▲
DISPLAY
SETUP
EDIT
RETURN
MODEL1722C series MODEL1722 series
RETURN
DATA
BOX
Radar display setup menu
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-4
Contents of radar setting menu
Item Description Settings Default Setting
EBL
Reference
References EBL bearing, shown in the
EBL data box, to North (True) or heading
(Relative)
True, Relative
(True only for north-up,
course-up and true
motion mode)
Relative
Cursor
Position
Chooses how to display cursor position.
LAT/LON: Lat/Long
position of cursor
TD:
Loran C or Decca
TDs
RNG & BRG-REL:
Range and bearing
referenced to ship’s
heading
RNG & BRG-TRUE
Range and bearing
referenced to North.
RNG & BRG-REL
Tuning Selects receiver tuning method. For
further details see “2.3 Tuning.”
Auto, Manual Auto
TX Sector
Blanking
Turns on/off
dead sector graphic, which
shows area where no echoes are
transmitted.
On, Off Off
Noise
Rejection
Electrical noise, appearing on the screen
as “speckles,” may be suppressed with
the noise rejector. Note that some forms
of interference cannot be suppressed
.
On, Off
Off
Background
Color
(Color model)
Chooses colors of background, range
rings and characters. Effective only when
HUE soft key is set for “MANUAL.”
Black/Green
Background: Black
Rings: Green
Characters: Green
Black/Red
Background: Black
Rings: Green
Characters: Red
Blue/White
Background: Dark Blue
Rings: White
Characters: White
DK Blue/White
Background: Dark Blue
Rings: White
Characters: White
White/Green
Background: White
Rings: Green
Characters: Green
(Echoes in white)
Black/Green
(Continued on next page)
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-5
Contents of radar setting menu (con’t from previous page)
Item Description Settings Default Setting
Echo Color
(Color model)
Chooses echo color.
Yellow, Green,
Multi (Echoes shown in
red, yellow or green in
order of descending
strength.)
Green
Watchman
Time
Sets watchman stand-by period. For
further details see paragraph 2.23
Watchman.
5, 10, 20 min 5 min
Range Unit
Sets unit of range measurement.
nm, km, sm nm
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-6
5.2.2 Radar range setup
You may choose the radar ranges you wish to use, from the RADAR RANGE
SETUP menu. (Available ranges depends on the network radar used.) After
choosing the ranges desired change the range with the [RANGE] key to activate
range settings.
At least two ranges (excluding maximum range) must be turned on. When less
than two ranges are turned on, you cannot escape from the range setup menu.
Note that the previous setting returns to the default setting when you change the
unit type.
1. Press the [MENU] key to show the main menu.
2. Press the RADAR RANGE SETUP soft key to show the RADAR RANGE
SETUP menu.
RANGE
SETUP
RETURN
ON/OFF
0.125nm
0.25nm
0.5nm
0.75nm
1nm
1.5nm
2nm
3nm
4nm
6nm
8nm
12nm
16nm
24nm
36nm
48nm
64nm
MAXIMUM RANGE XXnm*
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
▲
RANGE
SETUP
RETURN
ON/OFF
0.25km
0.5km
0.75km
1km
1.5km
2km
3km
4km
6km
8km
12km
16km
24km
36km
48km
64km
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
▲
Range unit: nm Range unit: km
* = Max. range depends on network radar used and is set on the network radar at installation.
MAXIMUM RANGE XXnm
*
Radar range setup menu
3. Use the cursor pad to select the range which you want to turn on or off.
4. Press the ON/OFF soft key to turn the range on or off as appropriate.
5. Press the RETURN soft key to register the setting.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Max. range
MODEL1722/1722C 24 nm 24 km
MODEL1732/1732C 36 nm 36 km
MODEL1742/1742C 36 nm 36 km
MODEL1762/1762C 48 nm 48 km
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-7
5.2.3 Function key setup
The function keys provide one-touch call up of a desired function. The default
radar function key settings are as shown in the table below.
Function Key Default Function Function Key Label
1 Turn heading line off. HL
2 Turn range rings on/off. RNG
3 Turn echo trail on/off. TRL
4 Turn display offcenter on/off. SFT
5 Select radar source. RSR
If the above settings are not to your liking you may change them as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the FUNCTION KEY SETUP soft key.
FUNC
KEY
RETURN
EDIT
▲
Function key
setting
Function
key label
SOFT KEY 1
HL: HDG LINE OFF
SOFT KEY 2
RNG: RINGS ON/OFF
SOFT KEY 3
TRL: ECHO TRAIL
SOFT KEY 4
SFT: OFFCENTER
SOFT KEY 5
RSR: RADAR SOURCE
H
L
R
N
G
T
R
L
S
F
T
R
S
R
Radar function key menu
3. Select the function key you want to program and press the EDIT soft key.
▲
SOF TKEY 1
OFF
HL: HDG LINE OFF
MOD: MODE
GAI: GAIN
SEA: A/C SEA
RAI: A/C RAIN
FTC: FTC
ES: ECHO STRETCH
PLS: PULSE LENGTH
ZOM: ZOOM
SFT: OFFCENTER
TRL: ECHO TRAIL
RNG: RINGS ON/OFF
▲
SOFT KEY 1
TLL: TLL OUTPUT
ALM: GUARD ALARM
EBL: EBL
VRM: VRM
TTM: TTM ON/OFF
WMK: WPT ON/OFF
WTM: WATCHMAN
ACQ: ACQUISITION
TX: STBY/TX
RSR: RADAR SOURCE
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
Scroll
down
Radar function key options
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-8
4. Select function desired with the cursor pad or [ENTER] knob and press the
ENTER soft key or [ENTER] knob to register your selection.
5. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Radar function keys
Menu Item Function Function Key Label
OFF Assigns no function. —
HL: HDG LINE OFF Turns heading line off. HL
MOD: MODE Selects presentation mode. MOD
GAI: GAIN Shows gain sensitivity adjustment window. GAI
SEA: A/C SEA Shows manual or A/C SEA adjustment window. SEA
RAI: A/C RAIN Shows A/C RAIN adjustment window. RAI
FTC: FTC Displays FTC window. Adjust FTC with the [ENTER] knob. FTC
ES: ECHO STRETCH Turns echo stretch on/off. ES
PLS: PULSE LENGTH Sets pulselength (long or short). PLS
ZOM: ZOOM Turns zoom on/off. ZOM
SFT: OFFCENTER Press to shift display center to cursor location. Press again to
turn shift off and return cursor to display center.
SFT
TRL: ECHO TRAIL Starts/stops echo trails. TRL
RNG: RINGS ON/OFF Turns range rings on/off. RNG
TLL: TLL OUTPUT Outputs cursor position, in NMEA format, to navigator. TLL
ALM: GUARD ALARM Displays alarm soft keys. ALM
EBL: EBL Switches control between EBL1 and EBL2 with each press. EBL
VRM: VRM Switches control between VRM1and VRM2 with each press. VRM
TTM: ON/OFF Turns TTM (Tracked Target (Message) data on/off. TTM
WMK: WPT ON/OFF Turns waypoint marker on/off. WMK
WTM: WATCHMAN Turns watchman on/off. WTM
ACQ: ACQUISITION Acquires and tracks cursor-selected target.(Requires
ARP-equipped Model 1833/1833C series network radar.)
ACQ
TX: STBY/TX Toggles between standby and transmit. TX
RSR: RADAR SOURCE Selects source for radar picture. RSR
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF Turns data boxes on/off. DBX
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL* Changes display control in combination display. CHG
*: When selecting CHG on a display, use the same soft key number on all display for CHG.
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-9
5.3 Plotter Setup
This paragraph provides the information necessary for setting up the plotter
display.
5.3.1 Navigation options
Navigation options, for example, waypoint switching method, may be set on the
plotter setup menu.
1. Show the plotter display and press the [MENU] key open the main menu.
2. Press the PLOTTER SETUP soft key.
WAYPOINT SWITCHING
ARRVL ALM CRCL
COURSE VECTOR
LINE
SET GOTO METHOD
1POINT
PLOTTER
SETUP
EDIT
RETURN
D. BOX
Display option menu
Contents of display option menu
Item Description Settings Default Setting
Waypoints
Switching
Chooses waypoint switching method. See
“switching waypoints” on page 3-51.
Perpendicular, Arrvl
Alm Crcl, Manual
Arrvl Alm Crcl
Course Vector
You may extend a line from the own ship
position to show ship’s course. It may be a
vector (length depends on ship’s speed) or a
simple line (course bar)
Line, Vector, Off Line
Set GOTO
Method
Sets the method by which to navigate to a
quick point. See paragraph “3.10.1 Navigating
to a quick point.”
1 Point, 35 Points,
35 Pts/Port Service
1 Point
D. BOX
(soft key)
Sets up data boxes. See paragraph 5.5.
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-10
5.3.2 Function key setup
The function keys provide one-touch call up of a desired function. The default
plotter function key settings are as shown in the table below.
Function Key Default Function Function Key Label
1 Start/stop recording/plotting own ship’s track. TRK
2 Edit mark/line. EML
3 Ruler (measure range and bearing between two points). RUL
4 Add new waypoint. ADD
5 Alphanumeric waypoint list. ALP
If the above settings are not to your liking you may change them as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the FUNCTION KEY SETUP soft key.
FUNC
KEY
RETURN
EDIT
▲
Function key
setting
Function
key label
SOFT KEY 1
TRK: TRACK ON/OFF
SOFT KEY 2
EML: EDIT MK/LINE
SOFT KEY 3
RUL: RULER
SOFT KEY 4
ADD: ADD NEW WPT
SOFT KEY 5
ALP: ALPHA LIST
T
R
K
E
M
L
R
U
L
A
D
D
A
L
P
Plotter function key menu
3. Select the soft key you want to program and press the EDIT soft key. A menu
shows the functions available and the current selection is highlighted.
SOF TKEY 1
OFF
ADD: ADD NEW WPT
MWP: MOVE WPT
RUL: RULER
GWP: GOTO WPT
GRT: GOTO ROUTE
EML: EDIT MK/LINE
TRK: TRACK ON/OFF
TTM: TTM ON/OFF
ETT: DEL TGT TRK
ALP: ALPHA LIST
LCL: LOCAL LIST
RTE: ROUTE LIST
▲
Scroll
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
Plotter function key options
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-11
4. Select function desired with the cursor pad or [ENTER] knob and press the
ENTER soft key or [ENTER] knob to register your selection.
5. Press the RETURN soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Plotter function keys
Menu Item Function Function Key Label
OFF Assigns no function. —
ADD: ADD NEW WPT Registers waypoint at cursor position. Place
cursor for waypoint location then press function
key.
ADD
MWP: MOVE WPT Moves selected waypoint to different position.
Select waypoint then press function key.
MWP
RUL: RULER Measures range and bearing between two
points. Press START POINT soft key to change
starting point if necessary. Range and bearing
between two points appears at the top of the
screen.
RUL
GWP: GOTO WPT Specify waypoint to set as destination. Enter
number in window and press the ENTER soft
key.
GWP
GRT: GOTO ROUTE Specify route to follow. Enter number in window
and press the ENTER soft key.
GRT
EML: EDIT MK/LINE Displays mark & line menu. Press appropriate
soft key to access menu item.
EML
TRK: TRACK ON/OFF Each pressing stops or starts recording of own
ship track.
TRK
TTM: TTM ON/OFF Turns TTM (target track) display on/off. TTM
DTT: DEL TGT TRACK Erases all TTM track. DTT
ALP: ALPHA LIST Displays waypoint alphanumeric list. ALP
LCL: LOCAL LIST Displays waypoint local list. LCL
RTE: ROUTE LIST Displays route list. RTE
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF Shows/hides data boxes. DBX
CHG: CHANGE
CNTRL*
Changes control in combination screen. CHG
*: When selecting CHG on a display, use the same soft key number on all
display for CHG.
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-12
5.4 Chart Setup
This paragraph shows you how to setup digital charts, from offsetting chart
position to turning chart attributes on or off.
5.4.1 Chart offset
In some instances position may be off by a few seconds. For example, the
position of the ship is shown to be at sea while it is in fact moored at a pier. You
can compensate for this error by offsetting chart position as shown in the
procedure below. You can execute the procedure from any display mode.
1. Show the plotter display and press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART
SETUP and CHART OFFSET soft keys.
34 24. 3456 N 359.9°M
124 24. 3456 W 59.9kt
+
CHART
OFFSET
SET
OFFSET
RESET
OFFSET
RETURN
Plotter display, chart offset selected
2. Use the cursor pad to place the cursor at correct latitude and longitude of
own ship position.
3. Press the SET OFFSET soft key.
4. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu. The “chart offset icon” (
)
appears.
To cancel chart offset, press the RESET OFFSET soft key at step 3 in the above
procedure.
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-13
5.4.2 FURUNO, Nav-Charts
™
chart attributes
Charts attributes may be turned on or off from the CHART DETAILS menu,
which you may display as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the CHART SETUP and CHART DETAILS soft keys.
LAT/LON GRID
ON
TEXT INFORMATION
ON
WAYPOINTS
LARGE
WAYPOINT NAMES
ON
CHART BORDER LINES
ON
LANDMASS
ON
NAVAIDS
ON
LIGHT SECTOR INFO
ON
OTHER SYMBOLS
OFF
MARKS SIZE
LARGE
▲
MODEL1722 series
LAT/LON GRID
GREEN
TEXT INFORMATION
ON
WAYPOINTS
LARGE
WAYPOINT NAMES
ON
CHART BORDER LINES
ON
LANDMASS
BRT YELLOW
BACKGROUND
BLACK
NAVAIDS
ON
LIGHT SECTOR INFO
ON
OTHER SYMBOLS
WHITE
MARKS SIZE
LARGE
▲
MODEL1722C series
CHART
DETAILS
EDIT
CNTOUR
LINE
RETURN
CHART
DETAILS
EDIT
CNTOUR
LINE
RETURN
Chart details menu (FURUNO, Nav-Charts
™)
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-14
Contents of chart details menu (FURUNO, NavCharts
)
Settings Default Setting Settings Default Setting
Item Description
MODEL1722C series MODEL1722 series
Lat/Lon Grid
Latitude and
longitude grids
Red, yellow,
green, light-blue,
purple, blue,
white.
Off
Green On, Off On
Text Information
Geographic
place, name
On, Off On On, Off On
Waypoints Waypoint size Large, Small, Off Large
Large, Small,
Off
Large
Waypoint
Names
Waypoint name On, Off On On, Off On
Chart Border
Lines
Border lines
(indices)
On, Off On On, Off On
Landmass
Landmass
brilliance
(monochrome
model), color
(color model)
Brt, Dim: Red,
yellow, green,
light-blue, purple,
blue, white.
Off
Brt Yellow Brt, Dim, Off Brt
Background
Chart
background color
White, Black Black —
Navaids
Navaid data on
Nav-Charts™;
lighthouse data
on FURUNO
charts
On, Off On On, Off On
Light Sector
Info
Lighthouse
viewing sector
On, Off On On, Off On
Other Symbols
Other map
symbols
Red, yellow,
green, light-blue,
purple, blue,
white.
Off
White On, Off On
Marks Size Mark size Large, Small Large Large, Small Large
< 10 m
Same as Other
Symbol
On, Red On, Off On
10 m
Same as Other
Symbol
On, Yellow On, Off On
> 10 m
Same as Other
Symbol
On, Light-blue On, Off On
CNTOUR LINE
soft key
(Depth contours
for depths at
right)*
Depth Info
Same as Other
Symbol
On, Red On, Off On
* = Depth contour color for MODEL1722C series available in, red, yellow, green,
light-blue, purple, blue,
and white.
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-15
CNTOUR LINE soft key
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the CHART SETUP and CHART DETAILS soft keys.
3. Press the CNTOUR LINE soft key.
DEPTH < 10m
ON
DEPTH = 10m
ON
DEPTH > 10m
ON
DEPTH INFORMATION
ON
10m: APPROX. 30ft OR 5fa
OR 6pb
MODEL1722 series
DEPTH < 10m
RED
DEPTH = 10m
YELLOW
DEPTH > 10m
LIGHT BLUE
DEPTH INFORMATION
RED
10m: APPROX. 30ft OR 5fa
OR 6pb
MODEL1722C series
CNTOUR
LINE
EDIT
RETURN
CNTOUR
LINE
EDIT
RETURN
Contour line menu (FURUNO, Nav-Charts
™)
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-16
5.4.3 C-MAP chart attributes
Charts attributes may be turned on or off from the CHART DETAILS menu,
which you may display as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the CHART SETUP and CHART DETAILS soft keys.
Page 2Page 1
CHART
DETAILS
EDIT
DEPTH
INFO
RETURN
CHART
DETAILS
EDIT
DEPTH
INFO
PREV.
PAGE
PLACE NAME
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
COMPASS
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
TIDE & CURRENT
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
NATURAL FEATURE
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
RIVER & LAKE
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
CULTURAL FEATURE
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
LANDMARK
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
CHART GENERATION
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
NEW OBJECT
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
COMPLEX OBJECT ICON
MULTIPLE
INFORMATION LEVEL
BASIC
NEXT
PAGE
Color
Page 2Page 1
Mono
WAYPOINT NAME
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
LAT/LON GRID
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
CHART BORDER LINE
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
BACKGROUND
BLACK
PORT & SERVICE
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
ATTENTION AREA
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
NAV LANE
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
LIGHT
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
BUOY & BEACON
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
SIGNAL
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
CARTOGRAPHIC OBJECT
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
WAYPOINT
ON
CHART
DETAILS
EDIT
DEPTH
INFO
RETURN
CHART
DETAILS
EDIT
DEPTH
INFO
PREV.
PAGE
NEXT
PAGE
PLACENAME
ON
COMPASS
ON
TIDE & CURRENT
ON
NATURAL FEATURE
ON
RIVER & LAKE
ON
CULTURAL FEATURE
ON
LANDMARK
ON
CHART GENERATION
ON
NEW OBJECT
ON
COMPLEX OBJECT ICON
MULTIPLE
INFORMATION LEVEL
BASIC
WAYPOINT NAME
ON
LAT/LON GRID
ON
CHART BORDER LINE
ON
PORT & SERVICE
ON
ATTENTION AREA
ON
NAV LANE
ON
LIGHT
ON
BUOY & BEACON
ON
SIGNALS
ON
CARTOGRAPHIC OBJECT
ON
WAYPOINT
ON
Chart details menu (C-map)
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-17
Contents of chart details menu (C-map)
Settings Default Setting Settings Default
Setting
Item Description
MODEL1722C series MODEL1722 series
Waypoints Waypoint display
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay On, Off On
Waypoint Names Waypoint name
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay On, Off On
Lat/Lon Grid
Latitude and
longitude grids
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay On, Off On
Chart Border
Lines
Border lines
(indices)
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay On, Off On
Background
Chart
background color
White, Black Black —
Port & Service
Port services
icon display
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay On, Off On
Attention Area
Attention area
icon display
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Plotter/
Contour, Off
Plotter/Overlay On, Contour, Off On
Nav Lane Navigation lanes
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay On, Off On
Light
Lighthouse icon,
sector
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Plot/No
Sector, Off
Plotter/Overlay
On, No Sector,
Off
On
Buoy & Beacon
Buoys, beacons
display
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay On, Off On
Signal
Signals category
icon
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay On, Off On
Cartographic
Object
Cartographic
objects category
icon
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay On, Off On
Place Name
Geographic
names
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay On, Off On
Compass
Compass
category icons
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay On, Off On
Tide & Current Tide display
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay On, Off On
Natural Feature Land outline
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay On, Off On
River & Lake Rivers and lakes
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay On, Off On
Cultural Feature
Cultural features
icons
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay On, Off On
Landmark
Landmarks
category icons
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay On, Off On
(Continued on next page)
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-18
Contents of C-MAP chart details menu (continued from previous page)
Settings Default Setting Settings Default
Setting
Item Description
MODEL1722C series MODEL1722 series
Chart Generation
Chart generation
category icons
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay On, Off On
New Object
New object
category icons
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay On, Off On
Complex Object
Icon
Single or multiple
icon for object
composed of
several icons
Multiple, Single Multiple Multiple, Single Multiple
Information Level
Basic or detailed
data for objects
Basic, Detailed Basic Basic, Detailed Basic
Bathymetric Line
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay On, Off On
Spot Sounding
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay On, Off On
Bottom Type
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay On, Off On
Depth Areas
Limit
0-99999ft
(m, fa, PB)
20,164ft (6, 50m,
3, 27 fa, 4, 30PB)
0-99999ft
(m, fa, PB)
20ft (6m, 3fa,
4PB)
DEPTH INFO
(soft key)
See illustration
on next page
Bathymetric
Range
0-99999ft
(m, fa, PB)
0-33ft (0-10m,
0-6fa, 0-6PB)
0-99999ft
(m, fa, PB)
0-33ft (0-10m,
0-6fa, 0-6PB)
Settings description
Basic: Shows basic characteristics of objects.
Detailed: Shows detailed characteristics of objects.
Multiple: Shows multiple icons for complex objects
Off: Turns item off.
On: Turns item on.
Plotter: Shows item on plotter display:
Plot/No Sector: Sector not shown on track display.
Plotter/Contour: Shows contour on track display.
Plotter/Overlay: Shows item on plotter and overlay displays.
Single: Shows single icon for complex objects.
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-19
DEPTH INFO soft key
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the CHART SETUP and CHART DETAILS soft keys.
3. Press the DEPTH INFO soft key.
MODEL1722 series
BATHYMETRIC LINE
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
SPOT SOUNDING
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
BOTTOM TYPE
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
DEPTH AREA LIMIT
00020, 00164ft
BATHYMETRIC RANGE
00000 - 00033ft
MODEL1722C series
DEPTH
INFO
EDIT
RETURN
DEPTH
INFO
EDIT
RETURN
BATHYMETRIC LINE
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
SPOT SOUNDING
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
BOTTOM TYPE
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
DEPTH AREA LIMIT
33 ft
BATHYMETRIC RANGE
00000 - 00033ft
Depth info menu (C-map)
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-20
5.5 Data Boxes Setup
You may select the data to show in the data boxes for the plotter, radar and
sounder displays. Six boxes may be displayed in case of small size data box and
two for large size data box.
1. Display the plotter, radar or sounder display, whichever you want to set.
2. Press the [MENU] key to open the main menu.
3. Press one of the following sets of soft keys depending on the display selected
at step 1.
Radar mode: RADAR DISPLAY SETUP, D. BOX
Plotter mode: PLOTTER SETUP, D. BOX
Sounder mode: SOUNDER MENU, D. BOX
▲
DATA
BOX
EDIT
RETURN
DATABOX SIZE
SMALL
POSITION ON
WAYPOINT OFF
COG ON
SOG ON
STW OFF
BEARING OFF
RANGE OFF
TIME TO GO OFF
ETA OFF
TEMPERATURE OFF
DEPTH OFF
TRIP LOG ON
DATE OFF
TIME OFF
WIND OFF
Data box menu
4. Use the cursor pad to select an item and then press the EDIT soft key.
5. Select ON or OFF as desired.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or the [ENTER] knob to register your selection. Six
items may be set to ON for small data boxes; two for large data boxes.
7. Repeat steps 4-6 to turn other items on or off.
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-21
5.6 Hot Page Setup
Five user-arrangeable hot pages are provided for quick selection of desired
display.
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by pressing the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION,
SYSTEM SETUP, HOT PAGE & NAV DISP SETUP and HOT PAGE SETUP
soft keys in that order.
HOT PAGE 1
HOT PAGE 2
HOT PAGE 3
HOT PAGE 4
HOT PAGE 5
Hot page setup menu
2. Use the cursor pad to select the hot page number to set and then press the
EDIT soft key. The full-screen selection window appears.
NAV
OVRLY
RADAR PLOT SNDR
HOT PAGE 1
Full-screen selection window (“OVRLY” for color model only)
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-22
3. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to select the full-screen picture desired and push
the [ENTER] knob. A set of combination screens, corresponding to the
full-screen selected, appears.
10
20
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
HOT PAGE 1
Combination screen selection window
4. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to select the full screen or combination screen
desired and push it to set.
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-23
5.7 Navigator Setup
This section provides the information necessary for selecting the type of
navigator connected to your plotter.
5.7.1 Navigation data
source
The NAV SETUP menu
mainly selects the source
of nav data. For GPS
receiver other than the
GP-310B, speed averaging
and local time offset (to use
local time) are also
available. Press the
[MENU] key followed by the
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION, NAV
OPTION and NAV
SOURCE SETTINGS soft
keys to display this menu.
Contents of nav setup menu
Item Description
Settings
Default
Setting
Position
Source
Chooses source of position data.
FURUNO BB GPS:
GPS
Receiver GP-310B
GP:
GPS navigator (via
NETWORK or NMEA connector)
LC:
Loran C navigator (via
NETWORK or NMEA connector)
All:
Multiple navaid connection
( via NETWORK or NMEA
connector)
ALL
Speed
Averaging
Calculation of ETA is based on average ship’s
speed over a given period. If the period is too long
or too short, calculation error will result. Change
this setting if calculation error occurs. The default
setting is suitable for most conditions.
0-9999 sec 60 sec
Local Time
Offset
GPS uses UTC time. If you would rather use local
time, enter the time difference between it and
UTC. Use the +<-->- soft key to switch from plus to
minus and vice versa.
-13:30 to +13:30 00:00
Temp
Calibration
Offsets NMEA water temperature data.
-40°F - + 40°F 0°F
Depth
Calibration
Offsets NMEA depth data.
-15 - +90 ft 0 ft
NAV
SETUP
RETURN
EDIT
POSITION SOURCE
ALL
SPEED AVERAGING*
0060
LOCAL TIME OFFSET*
+00:00
TEMP CALIBRATION
00
F
DEPTH CALIBRATION
00ft
* For GPS receiver other
than GP-310B.
Nav setup menu
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-24
5.7.2 GPS receiver setup (Set equipped with GP-310B)
The GPS SETUP menu sets up the GPS Receiver GPS-310B. Press the
[MENU] key followed by the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, NAV OPTION and
GPS SENSOR SETTINGS soft keys to display this menu.
GPS
SETUP
EDIT
LOCAL TIME OFFSET
+00:00
GEODETIC DATUM
WGS-84
POSITION SMOOTHING
000 second(s)
SPD/CSE SMOOTHING
005 second(s)
GPS SPEED AVERAGING
060 second(s)
LATITUDE OFFSET
0.000’N
LONGITUDE OFFSET
0.000’E
DISABLE SATELLITE
_ _ _ _ _ _
LATITUDE
38 00.000’ N
LONGITUDE
123 00.000’ E
ANTENNA HEIGHT
005 m
GPS FIX MODE
2D/3D
COLD START
NO
RETURN
GPS
STATUS
GPS sensor setup menu
Contents of GPS setup menu
Item Description Settings Default Setting
Local Time Offset
Lets you use local time (instead of UTC time). Enter
time difference between local time and UTC time.
Set this item when using the GPS-310B.
-13:30 to +13:30
hours
00:00
Geodetic Datum
Note: Geodetic Datum is a reference for geodetic
survey measurements consisting of fixed latitude,
longitude and azimuth values associated with a
defined station of reference. You must have the
correct Geodetic Datum selected in your plotter so
that it will reference the correct point on the chart for
a given lat / lon. Although WGS-84 is now the world
standard, other categories of charts still exist. refer
to Appendix for a full list of geodetic datum.
See Appendix for
full list.
WGS-84
Position
Smoothing
When the DOP or receiving condition is
unfavorable, the GPS fix may change greatly, even
if the vessel is not moving in water. This change can
be reduced by smoothing the raw GPS fixes. A
setting between 000 to 999 is available. The higher
the setting, the more smoothed the raw data. If the
setting is too high, the response time required to
show a change of Lat and LON will be too long. this
is especially noticeable if the vessel is moving fast.
This is especially noticeable at high ship’ speeds.
Increase the setting to increase the amount of
averaging applied to the GPS fix.
0-999 sec
0 sec (no position
smoothing)
(Continued on next page)
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-25
Contents of GPS sensor setup menu (con’t from previous page)
Item Description Settings Default Setting
Spd/Cse
Smoothing
During position fixing, ship’s velocity (speed and
course) is directly measured by receiving GPS
satellite signals. The raw velocity data may vary too
much depending on receiving conditions and other
factors. You can reduce this variance by increasing
the smoothing. Like with latitude and longitude
smoothing, the higher the speed and course
smoothing the higher the smoothing setting, the
more the raw data will be averaged. If this setting is
high, the response to speed and course changes
will slow. For no smoothing, enter all zeros.
0-999 sec
5 sec
GPS Speed
Averaging
Calculation of ETA is based on average ship’s
speed over a given period. If the period is too long
or too short, calculation error will result. Change this
setting if calculation error occurs. The default setting
is suitable for most conditions.
0-999 sec 60 sec
Latitude,
Longitude
Offset
Offsets latitude position to further refine position
accuracy. Use the N
<− −>
S soft key to switch
coordinate.
0.001’S – 9.999’N
0.001’E – 9.999’W
0.0’ (no offset)
Disable
Satellite
Every GPS satellite is broadcasting abnormal
satellite number(s) in its Almanac, which contains
general orbital data about all GPS satellites,
including those which are malfunctioning. Using this
information, the GPS receiver automatically
eliminates any malfunctioning satellite from the GPS
satellite schedule. However, the Almanac
sometimes may not contain this information. If you
hear about a malfunctioning satellite from another
source, you can disable it manually. Enter satellite
number (two digits, max. 3 satellites) with the
trackball and [ENTER] knob and press the ENTER
soft key.
None
Latitude
Sets initial latitude position after cold start. Use the
N
< − −>
S soft key to switch coordinate.
—
45
°
35.000’N
Longitude
Sets initial longitude position after cold start. Use
the W
< − −>
E soft key to switch coordinate.
—
125
°
00.000’W
Antenna
Height
Enters the height of the GPS antenna unit above
sea surface. For further details refer to the
installation manual.
0-99 m 5 m
GPS Fix
Mode
Chooses position fixing method:
2D (
three
satellites in view), 2D/3D (three or four satellites in
view whichever is greater)
.
2D, 2D/3D 2D/3D
Cold Start Clears the Almanac to receive the latest Almanac. No, Yes No
GPS
STATUS
(soft key)
Displays GPS satellite status display. Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B or GPS navigator
outputting the data sentence GSA or GSV. For further details see the chapter on Maintenance.
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-26
5.7.3 TD display setup
The TD SETUP menu sets which Loran C or Decca chain to use to display TD
position. (Connection of a Loran C or Decca navigator is not necessary to
display TD position.)
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, NAV OPTION and TD SETUP soft
keys to display the TD SETUP menu.
TD
SETUP
RETURN
EDIT
LORAN-C
GRI
9940:11-27
U.S. WEST COAST
CORRECTION 1
+000.0 µs
CORRECTION 2
+000.0 µs
DECCA
CHAIN
01 R-G
S BALTIC
CORRECTION 1
+00.00 lane
CORRECTION 2
+00.00 lane
TD setup menu
Displaying Loran C TDs
1. Select GRI and press the EDIT soft key to show the GRI & station pair
window.
GRI & STATION PAIR
U.S. WEST COAST
9940 11-27
▲
▼
▼
Loran GRI & station pair window
2. Use ▲ or ▼ on the cursor pad
to select GRI code.
3. Press ► to enable selection of station pair.
4. Use ▲ or ▼ on the cursor pad
to select station pair.
GRI & STATION PAIR
U.S. WEST COAST
11-279940
▲
▼
▼
Loran GRI & station pair window
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-27
5. Press the ENTER soft key to register your selection.
6. If necessary, you may enter a position offset to refine Loran C position
accuracy. Select (GRI) CORRECTION 1 or CORRECTION 2 and press the
EDIT soft key. Enter correction value with the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob
and then press the ENTER soft key or the [ENTER] knob. Use the +
<− −>-
soft key to switch from plus to minus and vice versa.
7. Press the RETURN soft key twice.
8. Press the GENERAL SETUP soft key.
9. Press the NEXT PAGE soft key.
10.Select “LORAN C” from “TD DISPLAY”, “TD” from “POSITION DISPLAY” and
press the ENTER soft key.
11. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Displaying DECCA TDs
1. Select CHAIN and press the EDIT soft key to show the chain & station pair
window.
CHAIN STATION PAIR
S BALTIC
01 R-G
▲
▼
▼
Decca chain and station pair window
2. Use ▲ or ▼ on the cursor pad
to select Decca chain number.
3. Press ► to enable selection of lane.
CHAIN STATION PAIR
S BALTIC
R-G01
▲
▼
▼
4. Use ▲ or ▼ on the cursor pad
to select lane pair (R: red, G: green and P:
purple).
5. Press the ENTER soft key to register your selection.
6. If necessary, you may enter position offset to refine Decca position. Select
(CHAIN) CORRECTION 1 or CORRECTION 2 and press the EDIT soft key.
Enter correction value with the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob and then press
the ENTER soft key or the [ENTER] knob. Use the +
<− −>- soft key to switch
from plus to minus and vice versa.
7. Press the RETURN soft key twice.
8. Press the GENERAL SETUP soft key followed by the NEXT PAGE soft key.
10. Select “DECCA” from “TD DISPLAY”, “TD” from “POSITION DISPLAY” and
press the ENTER soft key.
11. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-28
5.8 Nav Data Display Setup
The nav data display provides various navigation data, fed from a navigator,
network equipment, etc. You may select the data to display and where to display
it, on the NAV DATA menu.
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the main menu.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, SYSTEM SETUP, HOT PAGE & NAV
DISP SETUP and NAV DATA DISPLAY SETUP soft keys.
2
WPT POS
3
SOG
4
STW
5
COG
7
RANGE
8
DEPTH
9
TEMP
10
LOG TRIP
11
TTG
12
ETA
13
DATE
14
TIME
NAV
DATA
EDIT
RETURN
Positions
for full
screen
Positions
for half
screen
1
POSITION
6
BEARING
Nav data setup screen
3. Use the cursor pad to select a location
4. Press the EDIT soft key. The following display appears.
POSITION
WPT POSITION
SOG
STW
COG
BEARING
RANGE
DEPTH
TEMPERATURE
LOG TRIP
TIME TO GO
ETA
DATE
TIME
WIND
DISPLAY DATA
Nav data setup window
5. Select the data to display and press the ENTER soft key or [ENTER] knob to
register your selection.
6. Press the RETURN soft key.
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-29
5.9 Sounder Setup
This section shows you how to customize your sounder to your liking. You can
set fish alarm sensitivity, fine tune sensor data, etc.
5.9.1 System setup
1. Show the sounder display and press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
SYSTEM
SETUP
RETURN
SENSOR
SETUP
EDIT
FISH ALARM LEVEL
MEDIUM
TRANSMISSION
ON
TVG 200 kHz
3
TVG 50 kHz
3
ECHO OFFSET 200 kHz
+00
ECHO OFFSET 50 kHz
+00
BOTTOM LEVEL 200kHz
+000
BOTTOM LEVEL 50kHz
+000
KP PULSE
INTERNAL
SMOOTHING
SM3
TLL OUTPUT
ON
Sounder system setup menu
Sounder system setup menu description
Item Description Settings Default Setting
Fish Alarm
Level
Sets the fish alarm
sensitivity; that is the
minimum echo strength
which will trigger the fish
and fish (B/L) alarms.
High:
Orange and stronger
echoes (strongest echoes
on monochrome model)
trigger the alarm.*
Medium:
Yellow and
stronger echoes (medium
strength echoes on
monochrome model)
trigger the alarm.*
Low:
Green and stronger
echoes (weak echoes on
monochrome mode) trigger
the alarm.*
* = 8-color display
Medium
Transmission Turns TX power on/off. On, Off On
(Continued on next page)
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-30
Sounder system setup menu description (con’t)
Item Description Settings Default Setting
TVG
(50 kHz,
200kHz)
TVG (Time Varied Gain)
compensates for propagation
attenuation of the ultrasonic waves.
It does this by equalizing echo
presentation so that fish schools of
the same size appear in the same
density in both shallow and deep
waters. In addition, it reduces
surface noise. Note that if the TVG
level is set too high short range
echoes may not be displayed.
0-9 3 (both 50 kHz and 200
kHz)
Echo Offset
(50 kHz,
200 kHz)
If the on-screen echo level appears
to be too weak or too strong and the
level cannot be adjusted
satisfactorily with the gain control,
adjust echo offset to compensate for
too weak or too strong echoes. The
default setting for both 200 kHz and
50 kHz is zero.
-50 - +50 0 (both 50 kHz and 200
kHz)
Bottom Level
(50 kHz,
200 kHz)
If the depth indication is unstable in
automatic operation or the bottom
echo cannot be displayed in
reddish-brown by adjusting the gain
control in manual operation, you may
adjust the bottom echo level
detection circuit, for both 50 kHz and
200 kHz, to stabilize the indication.
Note that if the level is set too low
weak echoes may be missed and if
set too high the depth indication will
not be displayed.
-100 - +100 0 (both 50 kHz and 200
kHz)
KP Pulse Selects source of keying pulse. Internal,
External (See
installation
manual.)
Internal
Smoothing Smooths echoes to present stable
display. The higher the setting the
greater the smoothing.
SM1-SM4,
OFF
SM3
TLL Output Outputs cursor position to external
equipment.
ON, OFF ON
SENSOR
SETUP
(soft key)
Offsets speed, depth and water
temperature indications and speed
of sound.
See next section for details.
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-31
5.9.2 Sensor setup
The sensor setup menu lets you further refine speed, temperature and depth
data fed from the network sounder.
1. Show the sounder display and press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP and SENSOR SETUP soft keys to
show the SENSOR SETUP menu. The current ship’s speed, water
temperature, depth and speed of sound are shown at the bottom of the
menu.
SENSOR
SETUP
RETURN
EDIT
SPEED CALIBRATION
+ 00%
TEMP CALIBRATION
+ 0°F
DEPTH CALIBRATION
+0.0ft
ASCTC SPD CALIBRATION
+ 000m/s
SPEED
DEPTH
TEMP
ACSTC SPD
12.3kt
125.0ft
78.8°F
1500m/s
Sensor setup menu
3. Select item to adjust and press the EDIT soft key.
4. Use the cursor pad
to display appropriate value as below.
Speed and temperature calibrations: Enter plus or minus value. For
example, if the water temperature readout is 77
°
F but the actual water
temperature is 75
°
F, enter –2(
°
F).
Depth calibration: If you desire the depth readout to show the distance
between ship’s draft and bottom (rather than transducer and bottom), set
ship’s draft here. Enter a plus or minus value.
Acoustic speed calibration: Sets the speed of sound used by the network
sounder. Note that this is only used if water salinity is at an extreme level.
Under normal circumstances, do not adjust.
Sensor setup menu settings
Item Settings Default Setting
Speed Calibration -50 -+50% 0 (no offset)
Temperature Calibration -40
°
F - +40
°
F 0 (no offset)
Depth Calibration -5 - +60 (any unit of
measurement)
0 (no offset)
Acoustic Speed Calibration -500 - +500 m/s 0(m/s)
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-32
5.9.3 Sounding range, zoom range, bottom lock range
This paragraph shows you how to set custom ranges for basic range, zoom
range (marker and bottom zoom) and bottom lock range. All default basic ranges
are restored whenever the unit of depth measurement is changed. Therefore,
change the depth unit before changing the basic ranges.
1. Show the sounder display and press the [MENU] key to open the main menu.
2. Press the SOUNDER RANGE SETUP soft key to show the SOUNDER
RANGE SETUP menu.
RANGE
SETUP
RETURN
EDIT
RANGE 1
15 ft
RANGE 2
30 ft
RANGE 3
60 ft
RANGE 4
120 ft
RANGE 5
200 ft
RANGE 6
400 ft
RANGE 7
1000 ft
RANGE 8
4000 ft
ZOOM RANGE
10 ft
BOTTOM LOCK RANGE
10 ft
Sounder range setup menu
3. Select the range to change and press the EDIT soft key. Available settings
are as below. For sounding range, set depth from lowest to highest; a range
cannot be higher than its succeeding neighbor.
4. Use the cursor pad to set range desired, then press the RETURN soft key.
5. Press the [MENU] key to finish.
Default ranges
Range 1 Range 2 Range 3 Range 4 Range 5 Range 6 Range 7 Range 8
5 m 10 m 20 m 40 m 80 m 150 m 300 m 1200 m
15 ft 30 ft 60 ft 120 ft 200 ft 400 ft 1000 ft 4000 ft
3 fa 5 fa 10 fa 20 fa 40 fa 80 fa 150 fa 650 fa
3 PB 5 PB 10 PB 30 PB 50 PB 100 PB 200 PB 700 PB
Setting range: 2 m –1200m, 7 ft – 4000 ft, 1 fa – 650 fa, 1 PB – 700 PB
Zoom range and bottom lock ranges
Item Settings Default Setting
Zoom Range 2 m – 120 m, 7 ft – 400 ft,
1 fa – 60 fa, 1 PB – 70 PB
10 m, 30 ft, 10 fa, 10 PB
Bottom-lock Range 3 or 6 m, 10 or 20 ft
2 or 3 fa, 2 or 3 PB
6 m, 20 ft, 3 fa, 3 PB
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-33
5.9.4 Function key setup
The function keys provide one-touch call up of a desired function. The default
sounder function key settings are as shown in the table below.
Function Key Default Function Function Key Label
1 Output cursor position TLL
2 Suppress clutter. CLT
3 Erase weak signal. SLV
4 Suppress noise. NL
5 Set picture advancement speed. PA
If the above settings are not to your liking you may change them as follows:
1. Show the sounder display.
2. Press the [MENU] key.
3. Press the FUNCTION KEY SETUP soft key.
FUNC
KEY
RETURN
EDIT
▲
Function key
setting
Function
key label
SOFT KEY 1
TLL: TLL OUTPUT
SOFT KEY 2
CLT: CLUTTER
SOFT KEY 3
SLV: SIGNAL LEVEL
SOFT KEY 4
NL: NOISE LEVEL
SOFT KEY 5
PA: PICTURE ADV
T
L
L
C
L
T
S
L
V
N
L
P
A
Sounder function key menu
4. Select the function key you want to program and press the EDIT soft key.
▲
SOFT KEY 1
OFF
MOD: AUTO MODE
G20: GAIN 200 KHZ
G5: GAIN 50 KHZ
SFT: SHIFT
NL: NOISE LEVEL
CLT: CLUTTER
WMK: WHITE MARKER
HUE: HUE
SLV: SIGNAL LEVEL
PA: PICTURE ADV
TG: TEMP. GRAPH
TV2: TVG 200 KHZ
▲
SOFT KEY 1
TV5: TVG 50 KHZ
EO2: OFFSET 200K
EO5: OFFSET 50K
SMT: SMOOTHING
ZMR: ZOOM RANGE
BLR: B/L RANGE
TLL: TLL OUTPUT
SSR: SNDR SOURCE
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
Scroll
down
Sounder function key options
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5-34
5. Select function desired with the cursor pad or [ENTER] knob and press the
ENTER soft key or [ENTER] knob to register your selection.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or the [ENTER] knob to register your selection.
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Sounder function keys
Menu Item Function
Function Key Label
OFF Assigns no function.
MOD: AUTO MODE Display automatic mode selection window. MOD
G20: GAIN 200 KHZ Displays 200 kHz gain adjustment window. G20
G5: GAIN 50 KHZ Displays 50 kHz gain adjustment window. G 5
SFT: SHIFT Shifts range in manual operation. SFT
NL: NOISE LIMITER Suppresses noise. NL
CLT: CLUTTER Suppresses clutter. CLT
WMK: WHITE MARKER Sets white marker. (color only) WMK
HUE: HUE Sets hue (color model only). HUE
SLV: SIGNAL LEVEL Erases weak signals. SLV
PA: PICTURE ADV Sets picture advance speed. PA
TG: TEMP. GRAPH Turns temperature graph on/off. TG
TV2: TVG 200 KHZ Sets TVG for 200 kHz. TV2
TV5: TVG 50 KHZ Sets TVG for 50 kHz. TV5
EO2: OFFSET 200K Offsets echo strength for 200 kHz. EO2
E05: OFFSET 50K Offsets echo strength for 500 kHz. EO5
SMT: SMOOTHING Sets echo smoothing rate. SMT
ZMR: ZOOM RANGE Sets zoom range. ZMR
BLR: B/L RANGE Sets bottom-lock range for bottom-lock
display.
BLR
TLL: TLL OUTPUT Outputs current position to plotter. Also
inscribes line on sounder and registers
position as a waypoint.
TLL
SSR: SNDR SOURCE Selects source
for
sounder data.
Do not
change this setting.
SSR
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF Turns data boxes on/off. DBX
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL* Switches control in combination display. CHG
*: When selecting CHG on a display, use the same soft key number on all
display for CHG.
6. DATA TRANSFER
6-1
6. DATA TRANSFER
This chapter provides information for saving and replaying data to and from
memory cards, and uploading and downloading data.
6.1 Memory Card Operations
The memory cards function to store data, and the following data can be saved:
• Marks/lines
• Waypoints/routes
• Track
• Setting data
6.1.1 Formatting memory cards
Before you can use a memory card it must be formatted. This prepares the card
for use with the system. Note that formatting a memory card erases all saved
data.
1. Insert a blank memory card into the card slot.
2. Press the [MENU] key followed by the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, DATA
TRANSFER, UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD DATA and SAVE DATA TO MEMORY
CARD soft keys to show the SAVE DATA menu.
TRACKS
OFF
MARKS & LINES
OFF
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES
OFF
SETTING DATA
OFF
▲
SAVE
DATA
EDIT
SAVE
FORMAT
RETURN
Save data menu
3. Press the FORMAT soft key. You are asked if you are ready to format the
memory card.
4. Push the [ENTER] knob to format (or press the [CLEAR] key to escape).
“NOW FORMATTING MEMORY CARD” appears. Do not remove the card
while it is being formatting. When the formatting is completed, “FORMAT
COMPLETED. PUSH ENTER KNOB TO CONTINUE.” appears.
5. Push the [ENTER] knob to continue.
Note: If the memory card was not inserted correctly, the message “FAILED to
FORMAT MEMORY CARD.” appears.
6. DATA TRANSFER
6-2
6.1.2 Saving data to a memory card
1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot.
2. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CONFIGURATION, DATA
TRANSFER, UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD DATA and SAVE DATA TO MEMORY
CARD soft keys to show the SAVE DATA menu.
TRACKS
OFF
MARKS & LINES
OFF
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES
OFF
SETTING DATA*
OFF
▲
SAVE
DATA
EDIT
SAVE
FORMAT
RETURN
* = Plotter data only
Save data menu
3. Use the cursor pad to select item to save.
4. Press the EDIT soft key.
5. Use the cursor pad to select ON.
6. Press the ENTER soft key.
7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 to choose other data to save if desired.
8. Press the SAVE soft key. The message “NOW SAVING DATA TO MEMORY
CARD. DO NOT TURN OFF THE DISPLAY UNIT UNTIL COMPLETED.”
appears.
When saving is completed, “COMPLETED SAVING DATA. PUSH ENTER KNOB
TO CONTINUE.” appears. Push the [ENTER] knob to continue.
6. DATA TRANSFER
6-3
Memory card messages
Various memory card messages appear to alert you to memory card-related
error. These are tabulated below.
Memory card messages
Message Reason Remedy
Memory card is not
inserted. Please insert
card. Push ENTER
knob to continue.
Memory card not
inserted.
Push the [ENTER] knob to return to the
SAVE DATA display and then insert card.
Memory card is not
formatted. Push
ENTER knob to
continue.
Unformatted memory
card.
Push the [ENTER] knob to return to the
SAVE DATA display. Format the card
referring to page 6-1.
Wrong card is
inserted. Please insert
correct memory card.
Push ENTER knob to
continue.
Chart card inserted
instead of memory
card.
Remove chart, and insert memory card,
and then push the [ENTER] knob to
continue.
Overwrite data OK?
(Track)
(Mark)
(WPT)
(Config)
Data type to be
recorded exists on
memory card. (Two
or more of same type
of data cannot be
recorded.)
Push the [ENTER] knob to overwrite
same data type on the card, or press the
[CLEAR] key to escape.
6. DATA TRANSFER
6-4
6.1.3 Playing back data from a memory card
Data (track, marks, lines, waypoints, routes and setting data) can be loaded from
a memory card and displayed on the screen. This feature is useful for observing
past data and setting up the equipment for a specific purpose with “setup data.”
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION and
DATA TRANSFER soft keys.
2. Press the UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD DATA soft key.
3. Press the LOAD DATA FROM MEMORY CARD soft key to show the LOAD
DATA menu.
TRACKS
OFF
MARKS & LINES
OFF
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES
OFF
SETTING DATA*
OFF
▲
LOAD
DATA
EDIT
LOAD
RETURN
* = Plotter data only
Load data menu
4. Use the cursor pad to select item to load.
5. Press the EDIT soft key.
6. Use the trackball to select ON. (Select OFF to not load selected data.) Press
the ENTER soft key. If the memory card does not contain the item selected,
the buzzer sounds and ON cannot be selected.
7. After you select all items desired, press the LOAD soft key to load data. The
message “NOW LOADING DATA FROM MEMORY CARD.” appears.
8. After loading is completed, the message “COMPLETED LOADING DATA.
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO CONTINUE.” appears. Push the [ENTER] knob to
continue.
Notes on loading data
Tracks: Since loaded track data is added to internal track, oldest track will be
entered when the track memory capacity is exceeded.
Waypoints & routes: The loaded data substitutes for previously stored.
Marks & lines: The loaded data is added to internal data. When the mark/line
memory becomes full no marks may be entered.
Setting data: The loaded data replaces current configuration settings. If the
memory card is ejected while loading or data could not be loaded, push the
[ENTER] knob to restart with default settings. Note that track memory capacity is
not saved or loaded. To use loaded setting data turn the power off and on again.
6. DATA TRANSFER
6-5
6.2 Uploading, Downloading Data
You can upload waypoint and route data from a PC and download like data to a
PC, through the DATA 3 port at the rear of the display unit. Note that sounder
and radar data cannot be uploaded or downloaded.
6.2.1 Setting communication software on the PC
Set communication software on the PC as follows:
Baud Rate: 4800 bps
Character Length: 8 bits
Stop bit: 1 bit
Parity: Even
X Control: XON/XOFF (fixed)
The following data can be downloaded/uploaded between a personal computer
and this equipment:
• Waypoint data (In alphanumeric order)
• Route data (In order of route number)
• End of sentence
Note 1: There are two kinds of data for route data: route data and route
comment data.
Note 2: Wiring information appears on the UPLOAD or DOWNLOAD menu.
6.2.2 Uploading or downloading data
1. Connect the PC to the equipment.
2. Press the [MENU] key to show the main menu.
3. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
4. Press the DATA TRANSFER soft key.
5. Press the UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD DATA soft key.
6. Press the DOWNLOAD WPT/RTE DATA TO PC or UPLOAD WPT/RTE
DATA FROM PC soft key.
WAYPOINT & ROUTES
OFF
MARKS & LINES
OFF
▲
UPLOAD
EDIT
UPLOAD
SELECT
BPS
RETURN
WIRING INFORMATION
DISPLAY UNIT PC: DSUB9
TxD >1>-WHITE-<2<RD
RxD >2>-BLUE -<3<SD
RD-A >3>-YELLOW
RD-B >4>-GREEN
+12V >5>-RED
EXT BUZZ >6>-BLACK
GND >7>-SHIELD-<5<SG
RS232C SETTINGS
· 4800BPS,
· 8BIT,
·1STOP BIT,
· PARITY NONE,
· CONTROL Xon/Xoff
WAYPOINT & ROUTES
OFF
MARKS & LINES
OFF
▲
DOWN-
LOAD
EDIT
DWLOAD
SELECT
BPS
RETURN
WIRING INFORMATION
DISPLAY UNIT PC: DSUB9
TxD >1>-WHITE-<2<RD
RxD >2>-BLUE -<3<SD
RD-A >3>-YELLOW
RD-B >4>-GREEN
+12V >5>-RED
EXT BUZZ >6>-BLACK
GND >7>-SHIELD-<5<SG
RS232C SETTINGS
· 4800BPS,
· 8BIT,
·1STOP BIT,
· PARITY NONE,
· CONTROL Xon/Xoff
6. DATA TRANSFER
6-6
7. To change the baud rate, press the SELECT BPS soft key.
BAUD RATE
▲
▼
4800 bps
9600 bps
19200 bps
Baud rate window
8. Select baud rate and press the ENTER soft key.
Note: Select the speed among 4800, 9600 and 19200 bps.
9. Press the DWLOAD or UPLOAD soft key. You are asked if you are ready to
download or upload waypoints and routes.
10. Push the [ENTER] knob to download or upload data.
Waypoint data format
1 2 3 4 5 6 77
PFEC, GPwpl, llll.llll, a, yyyyy.yyy, a, c----c, c, c----c, a <CR><LF>
8
Waypoint data format
1: Waypoint latitude
2: N/S
3: Waypoint longitude
4: E/W
5: Waypoint name (Number of characters is fixed to 6 and space code is placed
when the number of characters are less than 6.)
6: Waypoint color
7: Waypoint comment (1 byte for mark code + 13 characters of comment.)
1st byte of mark code: Fixed to “@”.
2nd byte of mark code: Internal mark code. See Note 1.
8. Information of marking waypoint. Always set to “A”.
“A”: Displayed
“V”: Not displayed
Note 1: Following characters can be used for comments:
_ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789&'#
=9 =:
=;
=<
= =
=>
=?
=@
=A
=B
=C
=D
=E
=F
=G
=H
Characters available for comment
6. DATA TRANSFER
6-7
Route data menu
12
$PFEC, GPrtc, xx, c----c <CR><LF>
Route data format
1: Number of sentences required for one complete route data (1 to 4). See Note
2.
2: Number of sentences currently used (1 to 4)
3: Message mode (Always set to C)
4: Route No. (001 to 300, 3 digits required)
5 through 12: Waypoint name (Max. 8 names, length of each waypoint name is
fixed to 7 byte)
Note 2: A route can may contain 35 waypoints, and the GPRTE sentence for
one route data may exceed 80 byte limitation. In this case, route data is
divided into several GPRTE sentences (Max. 4 sentences). This value
shows the number of sentences the route data has been divided.
Route comment data format
$GPRTE, x, x, a, ccc, c----c, c----c, ... , c----c <CR><LF>
1 2
3
4
5
6 12
Route comment format
1: Route No. (01 to 200, 3 digits required)
2: Route comment (Max. 16 characters, variable length)
The same characters of the comment for waypoint comment can be used.
End of sentence
$PFEC, GPxfr, CTL, E <CR><LF>
End of sentence
6. DATA TRANSFER
6-8
6.3 Loading Waypoint Data from Yeoman
Waypoint data can be loaded from a Yeoman to this equipment. Connect the
Yeoman to any DATA port on this equipment and then follow the procedure
below.
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION key.
3. Press the DATA TRANSFER soft key.
4. Press the RECEIVE YEOMAN DATA soft key.
5. You are asked if you are sure to receive waypoint data from Yeoman
equipment. Push the [ENTER] knob to receive the data.
The message “NOW RECEIVING YEOMAN DATA. PUSH SOFTKEY ‘STOP’
TO STOP RECEIVING.” Is displayed. If waypoint capacity is reached the
message “WAYPOINTS FULL. NO MORE WAYPOINT CAN BE RECEIVED.
PUSH ANY KEY TO STOP.” appears.
6. To stop receiving, press the STOP soft key.
7. After waypoints have been received, press the [MENU] key to close the
menu.
6. DATA TRANSFER
6-9
6.4 Receiving Data Via Network Equipment
You can receive waypoints, routes, marks and lines from NavNet equipment.
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the DATA TRANSFER soft key.
4. Press the RECEIVE DATA VIA NETWORK soft key.
HOST NAME
MARKS & LINES
OFF
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES
OFF
RECEIVE
DATA
EDIT
RCV
RETURN
Receive data menu
5. Select HOST NAME and press the EDIT soft key.
HOST NAME
-------
Host name window
6. Use the cursor pad and the alphanumeric keys to input host name then push
the [ENTER] knob.
7. Select the data you wish to receive and press the EDIT soft key. For example,
select MARKS & LINES.
MARKS & LINES
▲
▼
ON
OFF
Marks & lines window
8. Select ON or OFF as appropriate and press the ENTER soft key.
9. Turn WAYPOINTS & ROUTES on or off as appropriate.
6. DATA TRANSFER
6-10
10. Press the RCV soft key to receive data.
The message “NOW RECEIVING DATA.” is displayed. IF no data could be
found the message “(HOST NAME)’ IS NOT FOUND.” appears.
11. When the transfer is completed, the message “DATA TRANSFER
COMPLETED. PUSH ENTER KNOB TO CONTINUE.” appears. Push the
[ENTER] knob.
12. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
6.5 Outputting Data Through the Network
Follow the procedure below to output data through the network.
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, SYSTEM SETUP, PORT SETUP and
OUTPUT THROUGH NETWORK soft keys.
SELECT
SNTNC
ON/OFF
RETURN
SELECT SENTENCE
AAM
APB
BOD
BWR
DPT
GGA
GLL
GTD
MTW
RMA
RMB
RMC
VHW
VTG
WPL
XTE
ZDA
HDT
HDG
MWV
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Select sentence menu
3. Select sentence with the cursor pad.
4. Press the ON/OFF soft key to turn sentence on or off.
5. Press the RETURN soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
7-1
7. MAINTENANCE,
TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter provides information necessary for keeping your unit in good
working order and remedying simple problems.
WARNING
Do not open the equipment.
Hazardous voltage which can
cause electrical shock exists
inside the equipment. Only
qualified personnel should
work inside the equipment.
7.1 Preventive Maintenance
Regular maintenance is important for optimum performance. A maintenance
schedule should be established and should at least include the items below.
Maintenance program
Item Check point Remedy
Display unit
connectors
Check for tight connection. Tighten loosened connectors.
LCD
The LCD will, in time, accumulate a
coating of dust which tends to dim the
picture. Wipe LCD lightly with soft cloth
to remove dust.
Do not use chemical cleaners to
clean any part of the display unit;
they can remove paint and
markings.
Ground terminal Check for tight connection and
corrosion.
Clean or replace ground wire as
necessary.
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7-2
7.2 Replacement of Fuse
The fuse on the power cable protects the equipment from reverse polarity of the
ship’s mains and equipment fault. If the fuse blows, find out the cause before
replacing it. Use the correct fuse (10A for 12 V, 5A for 24 V). Using the wrong
fuse will damage the equipment and void the warranty.
CAUTION
Use the proper fuse.
Use of a wrong fuse can cause fire or
damage the equipment.
7.3 Replacement of Battery
A battery fitted on a circuit board inside the display unit preserves data when the
equipment is turned off, and its life is about three years. When its voltage is low
the battery icon (
) appears at the top of the display. When the icon appears,
contact your dealer to request replacement of the battery.
Parts Name Type Code No.
Lithium battery CR2450-F2 ST2 000-133-495
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7-3
7.4 Simple Troubleshooting
This section provides simple troubleshooting procedures which the user can
follow to restore normal operation. If you cannot restore normal operation do not
attempt to check inside the unit. Any trouble should be referred to a qualified
technician.
7.4.1 General
General troubleshooting
If… Then…
you cannot turn on the
power
! check for blown fuse.
! check that the power connector is firmly fastened.
! check for corrosion on the power cable connector.
! check for damaged power cable.
! check battery for proper voltage output (10.8 to 31.2 V).
there is no response when
a key is pressed
! turn off and on the power. If there still is no response the key may be faulty.
Request service.
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7-4
7.4.2 Radar
Requires a network radar.
Radar troubleshooting
If… But… Then…
you pressed the
[POWER/BRILL] key and
the RADAR TX soft key to
show the radar picture
nothing appears on the display
! check that the signal cable between the
display unit and the antenna is firmly
fastened.
! Check that radar source is correct.
marks, legends appear no echo appears
! check in the power cable. If it is blown,
replace it.
picture not updated or
picture freezes
—
! check signal cable.
! turn the display unit off and on again.
tuning is adjusted sensitivity is poor
! Magnetron may need to be replaced.
Contact your dealer.
range changed radar picture does not change ! try to hit the [+] and [-] keys again.
! turn the display unit off and on again.
poor discrimination in
range
—
! adjust A/C SEA.
! Check heading and speed data for input.
true motion presentation
not working properly
—
! reselect true motion mode.
range rings are not
displayed
—
! Hit the RADAR DISPLY and RINGS soft
keys to display them.
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7-5
7.4.3 Plotter
Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B.
Plotter troubleshooting
If… Then…
position is not fixed within
three minutes
! check that antenna connector is firmly fastened.
! Check the satellites numbers received, on the GPS status display (GPS
SENSOR SETTINGS menu, GPS STATUS key see page 7-11).
position is wrong
! check that the correct geodetic chart system is selected, on the GPS SENSOR
SETTINGS menu.
! enter position offset on the GPS SENSOR SETTINGS menu.
track is not plotted
! plotting has been stopped. (“H” icon appears at the top of the display.) Press the
TRACK HALT soft key on the TRACKS & MARKS CONTROL menu to start
plotting again.
bearing is wrong
! check that correct magnetic variation is entered, on the GENERAL SETUP
menu.
Loran C (or Decca) TDs do
not appear
! check that LORAN C (or DECCA) is selected at TD DISPLAY on the GENERAL
SETUP menu. Also, check that proper Loran C (Decca) chains codes are
entered, on the TD SETUP menu.
Loran C TDs are wrong ! enter TD offset on the TD SETUP menu.
ship’s speed indication is
not zero after the ship is
stopped
! try to decrease speed/course smoothing on the GPS SENSOR SETTINGS
menu.
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7-6
7.4.4 Sounder
Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N.
Sounder troubleshooting
If… But… Then…
If you selected a
sounder display with the
DISP key
no sounder display appears
! check that the signal cable between the
network sounder and this equipment is
firmly fastened.
! check that the network sounder is
plugged in. The LED of the network
sounder should flash every second.
! Check that sounder source is correct.
marks and characters
appear
picture does not appear ! check for loosened transducer connector.
picture appears zero line does not appear
! the picture is shifted. confirm the shift
setting
picture sensitivity is too
low
—
! check gain setting, if using manual
operation.
! marine life or air bubbles may be clinging
to transducer face.
! bottom may be too soft to return a
suitable echo.
depth is not displayed
—
! adjust gain to display the bottom echo (in
reddish brown on the color model), if
you are using the manual sounder
mode.
! correctly display bottom echo on the
display, if you are using manual sounder
mode.
noise or interference
shows on the display
—
! check to be sure the transducer cable is
not near ship’s engine.
! check the ground.
! other video sounders of the same
frequency as yours may be operating
near you.
water temperature graph
appears but wrong or no
readout
—
! check that sensor cable is tightly
fastened.
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7-7
7.5 Diagnostics
This paragraph provides the procedures for testing the equipment for proper
operation. Four tests are provided: Memory I/O test, Keyboard test, Remote
controller test, and Test pattern.
7.5.1 Memory I/O test
The memory I/O test provides for individual testing of the display unit, GPS
receiver GP-310B, network sounder ETR-6/10N and ARP, displaying program
number and checking for proper operation.
1. Press the [MENU] key to show the menu.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
4. Press the TEST & CLEAR soft key.
5. Press the MEMORY I/O TEST soft key.
MEMORY
I/O TST
DISPLAY UNIT TEST
GPS SENSOR TEST*
NETWORK SOUNDER TEST**
RETURN
ARP TEST***
* = Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B.
** = Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N.
*** = Requires ARP-equipped Model
1833/1833C series network radar.
Test & memory clear menu
6. Then, press appropriate soft key to start a diagnostic test.
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7-8
Display unit test
Press the DISPLAY UNIT TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test
the display unit. The equipment displays program version number, checks
devices and shows the number of the chart card inserted in the chart slot (if
inserted). Results for device checks are shown as OK or NG (No Good). For any
NG, request service. Test connector required to check ports. “- -“ appears when
no test connector is no connected. Press the RETURN soft key to return to the
MEMORY I/O TEST menu. Chart number shown for C-MAP cards only.
PROGRAM No. 03591731XX
ROM1, 2 : OK
ROM3 : OK
SDRAM : OK
SRAM : OK
INT. BATTERY : OK
PORT
NMEA IN/OUT : --
NMEA IN : --
RS232 : --
HEADING : --
NETWORK : --
CHART NUMBER :
H. PULSE : OK
B. PULSE : OK
(22.5 rpm)
ON TIME :
000000.0 h
TX TIME :
000000.0 h
Machine Status +115
XX = Program Version No.
No results appear when
"sub" radar selected as
radar source.
Display unit test results (ex. MODEL1722C series)
GPS sensor test
Press the GPS SENSOR TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test
the GPS Receiver GP-310B. The equipment displays GPS receiver program
version number, and checks the GPS receiver for proper operation, displaying
OK or NG (No Good) as the result. For any NG, request service. Press the
RETURN soft key to return to the MEMORY I/O TEST menu.
PROGRAM No. 4850218XX
GPS UNIT : OK
Machine Status + 115
XX = Program Version No.
GPS receiver test results
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7-9
Network sounder (ETR-6/10N) test
Press the NETWORK SOUNDER TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST
menu to test the Network Sounder ETR-6/10N. The equipment displays network
sounder program version number, checks the ROM and RAM, and displays
water temperature (appropriate sensor required) and depth. The results of the
ROM and RAM check are shown as OK or NG (No Good). For NG request
service. Press the RETURN soft key to return to the MEMORY I/O TEST menu.
PROGRAM No. 02523060XX
ROM : OK
RAM : OK
TEMPERATURE
: 77°F
DEPTH
: 4000ft
Machine Status +115
XX = Program Version No.
Network sounder test results
ARP test (Requires ARP-equipped Model 1833/1833C series network radar)
The ARPA test is mainly provided for the service technician. Press the ARP
TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test the ARP. The results of
the ROM and RAM check are shown as OK or NG (No Good). For NG request
service. Press the RETURN soft key to return to the MEMORY I/O TEST menu.
PROGRAM No. 18590271XX
ARP ROM : OK
ARP RAM : OK
SPEED : OK 12.3kt
COURSE : OK 359.9°
TRIGGER : OK
VIDEO : OK
BEARING PULSE : OK
HEADING PULSE : OK
MINIMUM HIT : 0003
SCAN-TIME : 0250
MANUAL ACQ : 00
AUTO ACQ : 00
FE-DATA1 : 000
FE-DATA2 : 000
Machine Status +115
XX = Program Version No.
ARP test results
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7-10
7.5.2 Test pattern
The test pattern test checks the display for proper display of colors
(MODEL1722C series) or tones (MODEL1722 series).
1. Press the [MENU] key to show the menu.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
4. Press the TEST & CLEAR soft key.
5. Press the TEST PATTERN soft key to show test pattern.
RETURN
GREEN
BLACK
BLUE
GREEN
RED
WHITE
PRESS ENTER KNOB TO CHANGE
PATTERN.
RETURN
RETURN
MODEL1722C series MODEL1722 series
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO CHANGE
PATTERN.
Test patterns
6. For the MODEL1722C series, push the [ENTER] knob consecutively to
show white, red, green, blue and black colors.
7. Press the RETURN soft key.
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7-11
7.5.3 Keyboard, remote controller test
The keyboard test checks the controls on the display unit and remote controller
for proper operation.
1. Press the [MENU] key to show the menu.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
4. Press the TEST & CLEAR soft key.
5. Press the KEYBOARD & REMOTE TEST soft key.
For Remote Controller
For Display Unit
PUSH "CLEAR" KEY
3 TIMES TO RETURN
K-BOARD
TEST
I/R REMOTE CODE
Screen for testing keyboard, remote controller
6. Operate each control on the keyboard and remote controller one by one. A
key is functioning properly if its on-screen location “fills” in black (color
model) or green (monochrome model) when the key is pressed. For the
[ENTER] knob, rotate it to show X-Y position; push it to confirm function.
7. Press the [CLEAR] key on the display unit three times to escape from the
test.
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7-12
7.6 GPS Status Display
The GPS status display provides data about the GPS satellites, and is available
with connection of the GPS Receiver GP-310B or a GPS navigator outputting
the data sentence GSA or GSV.
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, NAV OPTION and GPS SENSOR
SETTINGS soft keys to display the GPS SENSOR SETTINGS menu.
3. Press the GPS STATUS soft key.
RETURN
DOP
1.2
GPS 3D
ALT
22 m
23:59:59
FEB 27 2001
GPS fix state
Date
DOP value
Receive signal level
Bars show satellite
signal levels. Satellites
whose signal level
extends past 40 are
used to fix position.
GPS antenna height
Estimated position of satellite in the sky.
Satellites used for fixing position appear
are circled.
23
12
29
27
01
17
26
05
20
21
30
28
30
40 50
SAT
No.
SNR
S
W
N
E
21
12
23
20
29
05
27
17
28
30
01
26
GPS status display
4. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to finish.
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7-13
7.7 Clearing Memories
Your equipment has a memory for each of the plotter, radar and sounder
sections. These memories can be cleared to restore the unit to default settings.
The following data are not cleared: Heading adjustment, timing adjustment, MBS
level, tuning point, tuning indication (short, medium, long), video level, dead
sector, antenna height, STC curve, antenna type, on time, TX time.
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
4. Press the TEST & CLEAR soft key.
5. Press the MEMORY CLEAR soft key.
DISPLAY UNIT
NO
GPS SENSOR
NO
NETWORK SOUNDER
NO
MEMORY
CLEAR
EDIT
RETURN
Memory clear menu
6. Use the cursor pad to choose the memory to clear.
7. Press the EDIT soft key.
8. Use the cursor pad to select YES and press the ENTER soft key. One of the
following displays appear depending on the selection made at step 6.
ALL SETTINGS EXCEPT
SNDR ARE RESET TO
DEFAULT. ARE YOU SURE?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
BEGIN COLD START TO
CLEAR GPS
MEMORY. ARE YOU SURE?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
SOUNDER WILL BE
SET TO DEFAULT.
ARE YOU SURE?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
Display Unit Clear GPS Receiver Clear Network Sounder Clear
Windows for clearing memory
9. Push the [ENTER] knob to clear memory selected.
10. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
11. Turn the power off, and on again.
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7-14
7.8 Error Messages
In addition to alarm message your equipment also displays equipment status
menus.
Equipment status error messages
Error Message Meaning Remedy
Connection with the ETR was
cut.
Network sounder disconnected.
•
Check that display unit where the
sounder is connected is turned
on.
• Check network sounder’s
cabling.
Connection with the RADAR
was cut.
Radar disconnected.
•
Check that display unit where the
radar is connected is turned on.
• Check antenna cable.
Low Voltage! Internal Battery Voltage of battery on circuit
board in display unit is low.
Have a qualified technician
replace the battery.
No bearing pulse detected. No bearing pulse from radar
antenna.
Check antenna cable.
No GPS fix! GPS navigator is turned off or
no GPS position data.
Check GPS navigator.
No heading pulse detected. No heading pulse
Check heading sensor.
A
P-1
APPENDIX
Menu Overview
MENU key
Radar
nm & sm range
(0.125/0.25/0.5/0.75/1/1.5/2/3/4/6/8/12/16/24/36/48/64)
km range
(0.25/0.5/0.75/1/1.5/2/3/4/6/8/12/16/24/36/48/64)
MENU Key
EBL REFERENCE (TRUE, RELATIVE)
CURSOR POSITION (LAT/LON, TD, RNG&BRG-REL, RNG&BRG-TRU)
TUNING (AUTO, MAN)
TX SECTOR BLANKING (ON (FROM SECTOR), OFF)
NOISE REJECTION (OFF, LOW, HIGH)
BACKGROUND COLOR (BLACK/GREEN, BLACK/RED, BLUE/WHITE,
DK BLUE/WHITE, WHITE/GREEN)*
ECHO COLOR (YELLOW, GREEN, MULTI-COLOR)*
WATCHMAN TIME (5, 10, 20 minutes)
RANGE UNIT (nm, km, sm)
DATA BOX soft key (Same items as on plotter menu.)
SOFTKEY 1 - SOFTKEY 5
(OFF, HDG LINE OFF, MODE, GAIN, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN, FTC,
ECHO STRETCH, PULSE LENGTH, ZOOM, OFFCENTER, ECHO
TRAIL, RINGS ON/OFF, TLL OUTPUT, GUARD ALARM, EBL, VRM,
TTM ON/OFF, WPT ON/OFF, WATCHMAN, ACQUISITION, STBY/TX,
RADAR SOURCE, DATA BOX ON/OFF, CHANGE CNTRL
Assigns function of each radar function key.)
RADAR
DISPLAY
SETUP
RADAR
RANGE
SETUP
ARP SETUP
FUNCTION
KEY SETUP*
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (See page AP-6.)
ARP TARGET INFO (INTERNAL ARPA, EXTERNAL ARP, OFF)
CANCEL ALL TARGETS (YES, NO)
ARP VECTOR MODE (RELATIVE, TRUE)
ARP VECTOR TIME (30seconds, 1, 3, 6, 15, 30minutes)
HISTORY INTERVAL (OFF, 30sec; 1, 3, 6 minutes)
CPA (OFF, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5, 6nm)
TCPA (30seconds, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 12minutes)
AUTO ACQUISITION AREA (ON, OFF)
TARGET ID NUMBER (ON, OFF)
* = MODEL1722C
series only.
(Requires ARP
circuit board in
network radar
1833/1833C
series.)
* Default settings for function keys:
SOFTKEY 1, HDG LINE OFF; SOFTKEY 2, RANGE; SOFTKEY 3, ECHO TRAIL;
SOFTKEY 4, OFFCENTER, SOFTKEY 5, RADAR SOURCE
APPENDIX
AP-2
Plotter
MENU Key
CHART OFFSET (offsets chart position.)
TRACKS
& MARKS
CONTROL
CHART
DETAILS
(
FURUNO,
NavCharts
TM
)
CHART SETUP
LAT LON GRID (ON, OFF) (RED, Y
EL, GRN, L-BLU, PPL, BLU, WHT)*
TEXT INFORMATION (ON, OFF)
WAYPOINTS (LARGE, SMALL, OFF)
WAYPOINT NAMES (ON, OFF)
CHART BORDER LINES (ON, OFF)
LANDMASS
(BRIGHT, DIM, OFF) (RED, YEL, GRN, L-BLU, PPL, WHT)*
BACKGROUND (WHITE, BLACK)*
NAVAIDS (ON, OFF)
LIGHT SECTOR INFO (ON, OFF)
OTHER SYMBOLS (ON, OFF) (
RED, YEL, GRN, L-BLU, PPL, WHT)*
MARKS SIZE (LARGE, SMALL)
CNTOUR LINE soft key
DEPTH < 10m (ON, OFF, Red*)
DEPTH = 10m (ON, OFF, Yellow*)
DEPTH > 10m (ON, OFF, Light blue*)
DEPTH INFORMATION (ON, OFF, Red*)
* = Denotes MODEL1722C
series only.
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP (ON, OFF)
OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR
(RED, YEL, GRN, L-BLU, PPL, BLU, WHT)*
TARGET TRACK DISPLAY (ON, OFF)
TARGET TRACK COLOR
(RED, YEL, GRN, L-BLU, PPL, BLU, WHT)*
INTERVAL (TIME, DISTANCE)
TIME INTERVAL (0 - 99m59s, 0m 10s)
DISTANCE INTERVAL (0 - 99.99nm/km/sm, 0.1nm)
MEMORY (TRACK & MARK) (2000/8000 pts)
* Colors: Red, Yellow, Green, Light-blue, Purple,
Blue, White
1
2
APPENDIX
AP-3
CHART
DETAILS
(C-MAP
chart)
WAYPOINTS SWITCHING
(PERPENDICULAR, ARRVL ALM CRCL, MANUAL)
COURSE VECTOR (VECTOR, LINE, OFF)
SET GOTO METHOD (1POINT, 35POINTS, 35PTS/PORT SVC)
PLOTTER
SETUP
WAYPOINTS (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*
WAYPOINT NAME (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*
LAT/LON GRID (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*
CHART BORDER LINE (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*
BACKGROUND (WHITE, BLACK)*
PORTS & SERVICE (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*
ATTENTION AREA
(PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, PLOTTER/CONTOUR, OFF)*
NAV LANE (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*
LIGHT(PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, PLOT/NO SECTOR, OFF)*
BUOY & BEACON (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*
SIGNAL (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*
CARTOGRAPHIC OBJECT (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*
PLACE NAME (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*
COMPASS (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*
TIDE AND CURRENT (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*
NATURAL FEATURE (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*
RIVER & LAKE (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*
CULTURAL FEATURE (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*
LANDMARK (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*
CHART GENERATION (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*
NEW OBJECT (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*
COMPLEX OBJECT ICON (SINGLE, MULTIPLE)
INFORMATION LEVEL (BASIC, DETAILED
DEPTH INFO soft key
Page 1
Page 2
(Continued from previous page)
* = Denotes MODEL1722C
series only.
For MODEL 1722 series,
ON and OFF.
1
2
1
BATHYMETRIC LINE (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*
SPOT SOUNDING (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*
BOTTOM TYPE (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)*
DEPTH AREA LIMIT (0-99999ft, 20, 164 ft)
BATHYMETRIC RANGE (0-99999 ft, 33 ft)
APPENDIX
AP-4
CREATE
VOYAGE-
BASED
ROUTE
SOFTKEY 1 - SOFTKEY 5
(OFF, ADD NEW WPT, MOVE WPT, RULER, GO TO WPT, GO TO
ROUTE, EDIT MK/LINE, TRACK ON/OFF, TTM ON/OFF, DEL TGT
TRACK, ALPHA LIST, LOCAL LIST, ROUTE LIST,
DATA BOX ON/OFF, CHANGE CNTRL)
(Assigns function of each plotter function key.)
FUNCTION
KEY SETUP*
NEW soft key
SELECT ROUTE soft key
(BCKTRK TIME, BCKTRK DIST, MANUAL)
WAYPOINTS
ROUTES
WAYPOINTS/
ROUTES
LOCAL LIST
ALPHANUMERIC LIST
WAYPOINT BY CURSOR
WAYPOINT BY RNG & BRG
GO TO soft key
NEW ROUTE soft key
EDIT ROUTE soft key
ERASE ROUTE soft key
LOG
RESTART soft key
RVRSE soft key
SPEED soft key
COORD TYPE soft key
* Defaut settings for function keys:
SOFTKEY 1, TRACK ON/OFF; SOFTKEY 2, EDIT MARK/LINE:
SOFTKEY 3, RULER; SOFTKEY 4, ADD NEW WPT;
SOFTKEY 5, ALPHA LIST
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (See page AP-6.)
1
APPENDIX
A
P-5
Sounder
MENU Key
NOISE LIMITER (OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH)
CLUTTER (0 - 16(9), AUTO)
WHITE MARKER (OFF, 1-8 (8-color), 1-16 (16 color))*
ZOOM MARKER (ON, OFF)
HUE (1-9, 1)*
SIGNAL LEVEL (OFF, SL1, SL2, SL3, SL4, SL5, SL6)
PICTURE ADVANCE (2/1, 1/1, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, STOP)
TEMPERATURE GRAPH (ON, OFF)
SPD SENSING PIC ADV (ON, OFF)
D. BOX soft key (Same items as on plotter menu.)
FISH ALARM LEVEL (HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW)
TRANSMISSION (ON, OFF)
TVG 200kHz (0 - 9, 3)
TVG 50kHz (0 - 9, 3)
ECHO OFFSET 200kHz (-50 - +50, 0)
ECHO OFFSET 50kHz (-50 - +50, 0)
BOTTOM LEVEL 200kHz (-100 - +100, 0)
BOTTOM LEVEL 50kHz (-100 - +100, 0)
KP PULSE (INTERNAL, EXTERNAL)
SMOOTHING (OFF, SM1-SM4, SM3)
TLL OUTPUT (ON, OFF)
SENSOR SETUP soft key
SPEED CALIBRATION (-50 - +50%, 0%)
TEMP. CALIBRATION (20 - +20 C/-40 - +40 F, 0 F)
DEPTH CALIBRATION (-15 - +60m/-15 - +90ft/-15 - +30fa/-15 - +30PB, 0)
ACSTC SPD CALIBRATION (-500 - +500m/s, +0m/s)
SOUNDER
SETUP
SOUNDER
SYSTEM
SETUP
RANGE 1 - RANGE 8*
ZOOM RANGE (2-120 m, 10 m; 7-400 ft, 30 ft; 1-60 fa, 10 fa; 1-70 PB, 10 PB)
BOTTOM LOCK RANGE (3 m/6 m; 10 ft/20 ft; 2 fa/3 fa; 2 PB/3 PB)
SOUNDER
RANGE
SETUP
SOFTKEY 1- SOFTKEY 5
(MODE, GAIN 200KHz, GAIN 50KHz, SHIFT, NOISE LIMITER,
CLUTTER, WHITE MARKER, HUE, SIGNAL LEVEL, PICTURE ADV,
TEMP. GRAPH, TVG 200KHz, TVG 50KHz, OFFSET 200KHz,
OFFSET 50KHz, SMOOTHING, ZOOM RANGE, B/L RANGE, TLL
OUTPUT, SNDR SOURCE, D. BOX ON/OFF, CHANGE CNTRL)
(Assign function of echo sounder function key.)
FUNCTION
KEY SETUP#
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (See page AP-6.)
* = MODEL1722C series only
Range 1 Range 2 Range 3 Range 4 Range 5 Range 6 Range 7 Range 8
5 m 10 m 20 m 40 m 80 m 150 m 300 m 1200 m
15 ft 30 ft 60 ft 120 ft 200 ft 400 ft 1000 ft 4000 ft
3 fa 5 fa 10 fa 20 fa 40 fa 80 fa 150 fa 650 fa
3 PB 5 PB 10 PB 30 PB 50 PB 100 PB 200 PB 700 PB
* = Default sounder ranges
SL1-SL2: Monochrome
SL1-SL3: 8 color
SL1-SL6: 16 color
# Default settings for function keys:
SOFTKEY 1, TLL OUTPUT; SOFTKEY 2, CLUTTER; SOFTKEY 3, SIGNAL LEVEL:
SOFTKEY 4, NOISE LIMITER, SOFTKEY 5, PICTURE ADV
APPENDIX
AP-6
System configuration
GENERAL
SETUP
NAV
SOURCE
SETTING
NAV
OPTION
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
KEY BEEP (ON, OFF)
LANGUAGE
(ENGLISH, others)
RANGE UNIT
(nm, kt; km, km/h; sm, mph; nm&yd, kt; nm&m, kt; km&m, km/h; sm&yd, mph)
TEMPERATURE UNIT (°C, °F)
DEPTH UNIT (m,
ft,
fa, PB)
TEMPERATURE SOURCE (ETR, NMEA)
DEPTH SOURCE (ETR, NMEA)
RESET TRIP LOG (Yes, NO)
LAT/LON DISPLAY
(DD° MM. MM ,
DD° MM. MMM
DD° MM. MMMM
DD° MM SS.S )
TD DISPLAY (LORAN C, DECCA)
SPEED (SOG, STW)
POSITION DISPLAY (LAT/LON, TD)
TIME DISPLAY (12 HOURS, 24 HOURS)
INFRARED REMOTE MODE (A, B, C, D)
RANGE & BEARING MODE
(GREAT CIRCLE, RHUMB LINE)
BEARING READOUT (TRUE, MAGNETIC)
MAGNETIC VARIATION (AUTO, MANUAL 07.0 W)
DISPLAY MODE (DAY, NIGHT)*
POSITION SOURCE
(FURUNO BB GPS, GP, LC, ALL)
SPEED AVERAGING (0-9999 sec,
0060 sec)
LOCAL TIME OFFSET (-13-+13:30 hr, +0:00)
TEMP CALIBRATION (-40 F - +40 F, 0 F)
DEPTH CALIBRATION (-15 - +90 ft, 0 ft)
Page 1
Page 2
* = MODEL1722 series only.
3
4
MENU key
APPENDIX
A
P-7
GPS
SENSOR
SETTINGS
TD SETUP
LOCAL TIME OFFSET (-13:00-+13:30, +0:00)
GEODETIC DATUM (WGS-84, WGS-72, OTHER)
POSITION SMOOTHING (0 - 999 sec, 0 sec)
SPD/CSE SMOOTHING (0 - 999 sec 5 sec)
GPS SPEED AVERAGING (0 - 9999 sec, 60 sec)
LATITUDE OFFSET (0 - 9.9999 , 0 N)
LONGITUDE OFFSET (0 - 9.9999, 0 E)
DISABLE SATELLITE (Max. 3)
LATITUDE (45 35.000’ N)
LONGITUDE (125 00.000’’ W)
ANTENNA HEIGHT (0 - 999m, 5 m)
GPS FIX MODE (2D, 2D/3D,)
COLD START (YES, NO)
GRI (9940: 11-27 (US west coast))
CORRECTION 1 (-999.9-+9999.9 µs, 0 µs)
CORRECTION 2 (-999.9-+9999.9 µs, 0 µs)
CHAIN (01: R-G (South Baltic))
CORRECTION 1 (-999.9-+9999.9 lane, 0 lane)
CORRECTION 2 (-999.9-+9999.9 lane, 0 lane)
GPS STATUS soft key
(Displays status of GPS satellites.)
3
4
3
APPENDIX
AP-8
= AAM, APB, BOD, BWR/BWC , DPT/DBT ,
GGA, GLL, GTD, MTW, RMA, RMB, RMC,
VHW, VTG, WPL, XTE, ZDA, HDT, HDG, MWV
#1
#2
= BWR with rhumb line; BWC with great circle
= DPT with NMEA 0183 Ver 2.0;
DBT with NMEA 0183 Ver 1.5.
#1
#2
= AAM, APB, BOD, BWR/BWC, DPT/DBT,
GGA, GLL, GTD, MTW, RMA, RMB, RMC,
VHW, VTG, WPL, XTE, ZDA, HDT, HDG, MWV
GPS/NMEA
PORT
(DATA 1)
PC/NMEA
EXT. BUZZ
PORT
(DATA 3)
FURUNO GPS
SENSOR (YES, NO)
OUTPUT FORMAT
(NMEA0183 Ver.1.5, 2.0)
LAT/LON FORMAT
(DD MM. MM
DD MM. MMM
DD MM. MMMM )
OUTPUT DESTINATION
(YES, NO)
NMEA OUTPUT FORMAT
(NMEA Ver.1.5, 2.0)
BAUD RATE
(4800, 9600, 19200 (bps))
BIT LENGTH (7bits, 8bits)
STOP BIT (1 bit, 2 bits)
PARITY
(EVEN, ODD, NONE)
SELECT SNTNC
(soft key)
PORT
SETUP
3
6
3
SYSTEM
SETUP
5
SELECT SNTNC
(soft key)
*2
*1
*1
*2
APPENDIX
A
P-9
* = Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B
** = Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N
*** = Requires ARP-equipped MODEL1833/1833C
series network radar.)
5
3
3
HOT PAGE
& NAV
DATA
DISPLAY
SETUP
TEST &
CLEAR
OUTPUT
THROUGH
NETWORK
MEMORY
I/O TEST
SIMULATION
SETUP
HOT PAGE SETUP
(Sets up hot pages 1-5.)
RADAR
(SIMULATION 1, SIMULATION 2, LIVE)
PLOTTER (SIMULATION, LIVE)
SOUNDER
(SIMULATION 1, SIMULATION 2, LIVE)
SPEED (0.0-99 kt, 0 kt)
COURSE (8 Figure, Direction 0.0-359.9°, 0.0°
LATITUDE (85°0.0’N-85°0.0’ , 45°35.0’N)
LONGITUDE (180°0.0’E-180°0.0’W, 125°00.000’ W)
START DATE & TIME (00:00 01. APR. 00)
RADAR SIMULATION DATA (YES, NO)
NAV DATA DISPLAY SETUP
(Configures nav data displays.)
TEST PATTERN
(Displays test pattern.)
AAM, APB, BOD, BWR, DBT, DPT,
GGA, GLL, GTD, MTW, RMA, RMB,
RMC, VHW, VTG, WPL, XTE, ZDA,
HDT, HDG, MWV
Chooses data sentences to output to
NavNet equipment.
MEMORY
CLEAR
KEY BOARD & REMOTE TEST
(Tests keyboard and remote controller.)
DISPLAY UNIT (Yes, No)
GPS SENSOR (Yes, No)
NETWORK SOUNDER (Yes, No)
DISPLAY UNIT TEST
GPS SENSOR TEST* NETWORK
NETWORK SOUNDER TEST**
ARP TEST***
6
APPENDIX
AP-10
3
DATA
TRANSFER
UPLOAD/
DOWNLOAD
DATA
RECEIVE YEOMAN DATA (Receives waypoint
data from Yeoman.)
DOWNLOAD WPT/ROUTE TO PC
(WAYPOINTS & ROUTES ON, OFF,
MARKS & LINES ON, OFF)
UPLOAD WPT/ROUTE FROM PC
(WAYPOINTS & ROUTES ON, OFF,
MARKS & LINES ON, OFF)
SAVE DATA TO MEMORY CARD
(TRACKS ON, OFF , MARKS & LINES ON, OFF,
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES ON, OFF,
SETTING DATA ON, OFF)
LOAD DATA IN MEMORY CARD
(TRACK ON, OFF, MARKS & LINES ON, OFF,
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES ON, OFF,
SETTING DATA ON, OFF)
RECEIVE DATA
VIA NETWORK
HOST NAME (PLOT1)
MARKS & LINES (ON, OFF)
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES
(ON, OFF)
APPENDIX
A
P-11
ALARM key
ALARM key SET GUARD 1 (ERASE GUARD 1)
SET GUARD 2 (ERASE GUARD 2)
AUDIO ALARM (INT & EXT BUZZ, INTERNAL BUZZ, OFF)
ARRIVAL ALARM (ON, OFF, default range: 0.010 nm(km/sm))
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM (ON, OFF, default range: 0.010 nm(km/sm))
PROXIMITY ALARM (ON, OFF)
XTE ALARM (ON, OFF, default range: 0.050 nm(km/sm))
SPEED ALARM (WITHIN, UNDER/OVER, OFF)
TRIP ALARM (ON, OFF)
BOTTOM ALARM (ON, OFF)
TEMPERATURE ALARM (WITHIN RANGE, OUT OF RANGE, OFF)
Plotter
Alarms
AUDIO ALARM (INT & EXT BUZZ, INTERNAL BUZZ, OFF)
BOTTOM ALARM (ON, OFF)
TEMPERATURE ALARM (WITHIN, OUT OF RANGE, OFF)
FISH ALARM (ON, OFF)
FISH ALARM (B/L) (ON, OFF)
Sounder
Alarms
ALARM key
NEXT INFO (Shows which alarms have been violated.)
CLEAR ALARM (Acknowledges violated alarm.)
ALARM key
NEXT INFO (Shows which alarms have been violated.)
CLEAR ALARM (Acknowledges violated alarm.)
Radar
Alarm
APPENDIX
AP-12
Geodetic Chart List
001: WGS84
002: WGS72
003: TOKYO : Mean Value (Japan, Korea, and Okinawa)
004: NORTH AMERICAN 1927 : Mean Value (CONUS)
005: EUROPEAN 1950 : Mean Value
006: AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1984 : Australia and Tasmania Island
007: ADINDAN : Mean Value (Ethiopia and Sudan)
008: : Ethiopia
009: : Mall
010: : Senegal
011: : Sudan
012: AFG : Somalia
013: AIN EL ABD 1970 : Bahrain Island
014: ANNA 1 ASTRO 1965 : Cocos Island
015: ARC 1950 : Mean Value
016: : Botswana
017: : Lesotho
018: : Malawi
019: : Swaziland
020: : Zaire
021: : Zambia
022: : Zimbabwe
023: ARC 1960 : Mean Value (Kenya, Tanzania)
024: : Kenya
025: : Tanzania
026: ASCENSION ISLAND 1958 : Ascension Island
027: ASTRO BEACON "E" : Iwo Jima Island
028: ASTRO B4 SOR. ATOLL : Tem Island
029: ASTRO POS 71/4 : St. Helena Island
030: ASTRONOMIC STATION 1952 : Marcus Island
031: AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1966 : Australia and Tasmania Island
032: BELLEVUE (IGN) : Efate and Erromango Islands
033: BERMUDA 1957 : Bermuda Islands
034: BOGOTA OBSERVATORY : Colombia
035: CAMPO INCHAUSPE : Argentina
036: CANTON ISLAND 1966 : Phoenix Islands
037: CAPE : South Africa
038: CAPE CANAVERAL : Mean Value (Florida and Bahama Islands)
039: CARTHAGE : Tunisia
040: CHATHAM 1971 : Chatham Island (New Zealand)
041: CHUA ASTRO : Paraguay
042: CORREGO ALEGRE : Brazil
043: DJAKARTA (BATAVIA) : Sumatra Island (Indonesia)
044: DOS 1968 : Gizo Island (New Georgia Island)
045: EASTER ISLAND 1967 : Easter Island
046: EUROPEAN 1950 (Cont'd) : Western Europe
047: : Cyprus
048: : Egypt
049: : England, Scotland, Channel, and Shetland Islands
050: : England,Ireland, Scotland, and Shetland Islands
051: : Greece
052: : Iran
053: : Italy Sardinia
054: : Italy Sicily
055: : Norway and Finland
056: : Portugal and Spain
057: EUROPEAN 1979 : Mean Value
058: GANDAJIKA BASE : Republic of Maldives
059: GEODETIC DATUM 1949 : New Zealand
060: GUAM 1963 : Guam Island
061: GUX 1 ASTRO : Guadalcanal Island
062: HJORSEY 1955 : Iceland
063: HONG KONG 1963 : Hong Kong
064: INDIAN : Thailand and Vietnam
065: : Bangladesh, India, and Nepal
066: IRELAND 1956 : Ireland
067: ISTS 073 ASTRO 1969 : Diego Garcia
068: JHONSTON ISLAND 1961 : Johnston Island
069: KANDAWALA : Sri Lanka
070: KERGUELEN ISLAND : Kerguelen Island
071: KERTAU 1948 : West Malaysia and Singapore
072: LA REUNION : Mascarene Island
073: L.C. 5 ASTRO : Cayman Brac Island
074: LIBERIA 1964 : Liberia
075: LUZON : Philippines (Excluding Mindanao Island)
076: : Mindanao Island
077: MAHE 1971 : Mahe Island
078: MARCO ASTRO : Salvage Islands
079: MASSAWA : Eritrea (Ethiopia)
080: MERCHICH : Morocco
081: MIDWAY ASTRO 1961 : Midway Island
082: MINNA : Nigeria
083: NAHRWAN : Masirah Island(Oman)
084: : United Arab Emirates
085: : Saudi Arabia
086: NAMIBIA : Namibia
087: MAPARIMA, BWI : Trinidad and Tobago
088: NORTH AMERICAN 1927 : Western United States
089: : Eastern United States
090: : Alaska
091: : Bahamas (Excluding San Salvador Island)
092: : Bahamas San Salvador Island
093: : Canada (Including Newfoundland Island)
094: : Alberta and British Columbia
095: : East Canada
096: : Manitoba and Ontario
097: : Northwest Territories and Saskatchewan
098: : Yukon
099: : Canal Zone
100: : Caribbean
101: : Central America
102: : Cuba
103: : Greenland
104: : Mexico
105: NORTH AMERICAN 1983 : Alaska
106: : Canada
107: : CONUS
108: : Mexico, Central America
109: OBSERVATORIO 1966 : Corvo and Flores Islands (Azores)
110: OLD EGYPTIAN 1930 : Egypt
111: OLD HAWAIIAN : Mean Value
112: : Hawaii
113: : Kaual
114: : Maui
115: : Oahu
116: OMAN : Oman
117: ORDNANCE SURVEY OF GREAT BRITAIN 1936 : Mean Value
118: : England
119: : England, Isle of Man, and Wales
120: : Scotland and Shetland Islands
121: : Wales
122: PICO DE LAS NIVIES : Canary Islands
123: PITCAIRN ASTRO 1967 : Pitcairn Island
124: PROVISIONAL SOUTH CHILEAN 1963 : South Chile (near 53°s)
125: PROVISIONAL SOUTH AMERICAN 1956 : Mean Value
126: : Bolivia
127: : Chile Northern Chie (near 19° s)
128: : Chile Southern Chile (near 43° s)
129: : Colombia
130: : Ecuador
131: : Guyana
132: : Peru
133: : Venezuela
134: PUERTO RICO : Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands
135: QATAR NATIONAL : Qatar
136: QORNOQ : South Greenland
137: ROME 1940 : Sardinia Islands
138: SANTNA BRAZ : Sao Maguel, Santa Maria Islands (Azores)
139: SANTO (DOS) : Espirito Santo Island
140: SAPPER HILL 1943 : East Falkland Island
141: SOUTH AMERICAN 1969 : Mean Value
142: : Argentina
143: : Bolivia
144: : Brazil
145: : Chile
146: : Colombia
147: : Ecuador
148: : Guyana
149: : Paraguay
150: : Peru
151: : Trinidad and Tobago
152: : Venezuela
153: SOUTH ASIA : Singapore
154: SOUTHEAST BASE : Porto Santo and Medeira Islands
155: SOUTHWEST BASE : Faial, Graciosa, Pico, Sao Jorge, and Terceira Islands
156: TIMBALAI 1948 : Brunel and East Malaysia (Sarawak and Sadah)
157: TOKYO : Japan
158: : Korea
159: : Okinawa
160: TRISTAN ASTRO 1968 : Tristan da Cunha
161: VITI LEVU 1916 : Viti Levu Island (Fiji Islands)
162: WAKE-ENIWETOK 1960 : Marshall Islands
163: ZANDERIJ : Suriname
164: BUKIT RIMPAH : Bangka and Belitung Islands (Indonesia)
165: CAMP AREA ASTRO : Camp Mcmurdo Area, Antarctica
166: G. SEGARA : Kalimantan Islands(Indonesia)
167: HERAT NORTH : Afghanistan
168: HU-TZU-SHAN : Taiwan
169: TANANARIVE OBSERVATORY 1925 : Madagascar
170: YACARE : Uruguay
171: RT-90 : Sweden
172 : Pulkovo 1942 : Russia
APPENDIX
A
P-13
World Time Chart
APPENDIX
AP-14
Icons
Icon Meaning
North marker. Points to North.
Correct chart and suitable scale - full chart reliability.
Chart overenlarged.
Chart card not inserted.
Wrong chart card inserted.
Chart scale too small.
Plotter, sounder alarm setting violated.
Track is not being recorded or plotted.
Chart offset applied.
S A
V E
Voyage-based route being created.
Latitude and longitude position offset applied.
S
I
M
Simulation mode
Voltage of battery on circuit board in display unit is low. Contact your dealer
about replacement.
SP - 1 E3494S01F
SPECIFICATIONS OF THE MARINE RADAR
MODEL 1722/1732/1742/1762
MODEL 1722C/1732C/1742C/1762C
1. GENERAL
1.1. Indication System
M1722/1732/1742/1762 PPI Daylight display, raster scan, 4 tones monochrome LCD
M1722C/1732C/1742C/1762C PPI Daylight display, raster scan, color LCD
1.2. Range, Pulse length (PL) & Pulse Repetition Rate (PRR)
Range (nm) Pulse length (µs) PRR (Hz
approx.)
0.125 to 1.5 0.08 2100
1.5 to 3 0.3 1200
3 to 48* 0.8 600
*Maximum Range: M1722/C: 24nm, M1732/C: 36nm, M1742/C: 36nm, M1762/C: 48nm
1.3. Range Resolution 29 m
1.4. Bearing Resolution M1722/C: 6.7°, M1732/C: 5.5°, M1742/C: 5.0°, M1762/C: 3.9°
1.5. Minimum Range 41 m
1.6. Bearing Accuracy ±1°
1.7. Range Ring Accuracy 0.9 % of range or 8 m, whichever is the greater
2. SCANNER UNIT
2.1. MODEL1722/C:
2.1.1. Radiator Micro-strip
2.1.2. Polarization Horizontal
2.1.3. Antenna Rotation Speed 23 rpm nominal
2.1.4. Radiator Length 45 cm
2.1.5. Horizontal Beamwidth less than 5.2°
2.1.6. Vertical Beamwidth 25°
2.1.7. Sidelobe Attenuation less than -20 dB
2.2. MODEL1732/C:
2.2.1. Radiator Printed waveguide array
2.2.2. Polarization Horizontal
2.2.3. Antenna Rotation Speed 24 rpm nominal
2.2.4. Radiator Length 60 cm
2.2.5. Horizontal Beamwidth less than 4°
2.2.6. Vertical Beamwidth 20°
SP - 2 E3494S01F
2.2.7. Sidelobe Attenuation less than -18 dB
2.3. MODEL1742/C:
2.3.1. Radiator Slotted waveguide array
2.3.2. Polarization Horizontal
2.3.3. Antenna Rotation Speed 24 rpm nominal
2.3.4. Radiator Length 60 cm
2.3.5. Horizontal Beamwidth less than 3.5°
2.3.6. Vertical Beamwidth 30°
2.3.7. Sidelobe Attenuation less than -20 dB
2.4. MODEL1762/C:
2.4.1. Radiator Slotted waveguide array
2.4.2. Polarization Horizontal
2.4.3. Antenna Rotation Speed 24 rpm nominal
2.4.4. Radiator Length 100 cm
2.4.5. Horizontal Beamwidth less than 2.4°
2.4.6. Vertical Beamwidth 27°
2.4.7. Sidelobe Attenuation less than -24 dB
3. TRANSCEIVER MODULE
3.1. Frequency and Modulation 9410 MHz ±30MHz (X band), P0N
3.2. Peak Output Power M1722/1742/1722C/1742C: 2 kW nominal,
M1732/1762/1731C/1762C: 4 kW nominal
3.3. Modulator FET Switching Method
3.4. Intermediate Frequency 60 MHz
3.5. Tuning Automatic
3.6. Receiver Front End MIC (Microwave IC)
3.7. Bandwidth 7 MHz
3.8. Duplexer Circulator with diode limiter
3.9. Warming up M1722/1722C: 60 sec. approx.
M1732/1742/1762(C): 90 sec. approx.
4. DISPLAY UNIT
4.1. Display
M1722 /1732/1742/1762: 7 inch rectangular monochrome LCD, 240(H) x 320(V) dots,
Effective radar display area: 216 x 216 dots
M1722C/1732C/1742C/1762C: 7 inch rectangular color LCD, 234(H) x 320(V) dots,
SP - 3 E3494S01F
Effective radar display area: 216 x 216 dots
4.2. Range, Range Ring Interval (RRI), Number of Rings
Range (NM) 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 36 48
RRI (NM) 0.0625 0.125 0.125 0.25 0.2
5
0.5 0.5 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 12 12
Number of Rings 2 2 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 4 4 4 3 4
Maximum range: M1722/C: 24nm, M1732/1742(C): 36nm, M1762/C: 48nm
4.3. Markers Heading Line, Bearing Scale, Range Rings,
Variable Range Marker (VRM), Electronic Bearing Line (EBL),
Alarm Zone, Waypoint Mark (navigation input required)
4.4. Alphanumeric Indications Range, Range Ring Interval, Interference Rejection (IR),
Variable Range Marker (VRM), Electronic Bearing Line (EBL),
Stand-by (ST-BY), Guard Alarm (G(IN), G(OUT)),
Echo Stretch (ES), Echo Tailing (TRAIL), Trailing Time,
Watchman (WATCHMAN),
4.5. Input Data IEC 61162-1
Own ship’s position: GGA>RMC>RMA>GLL
Ship’s speed: RMC>RMA>VTG>VHW
Bearing (True): HDT>HDG
*1
>HDM
*1
Course: RMC>RMA>VTG
Water depth: DPT>DBT
Wind: MWV>VWT>VWR
Water Temperature: MTW
Time: ZDA
*1
: calculated by magnetic deviation
4.6. Output Data
Alarm signal 12 VDC, 100 mA or less
NMEA 0183 Ver1.5 GGA, GLL, RMA, RMC, GTD, VTG, ZDA (GPS data required)
RMB, WPL, BWC or BWR, APB, AAM, BOD, XTE, VHW, MTW,
DPT or DBT, DBS (ETR required), TTM (ARPA required)
5. PLOTTER FUNCTION
5.1. Projection Mercator
5.2. Usable Area 85 latitude or below
5.3. Effective Area 133.4 x 97.3 mm
5.4. Display pixels 240 x 320 dots (M1722 series), 234 x 320 dots (M1722C series)
5.5. Position Indication Latitude/longitude, Loran C LOP or DECCA LOP
5.6. Effective Projection Area 0.125 nm to 1,024 nm (at equatorial area)
SP - 4 E3494S01F
5.7. Track Display Plot interval: by time (1 s to 99 m 59 s) or
by distance (0 to 99.9 nm)
5.8. Colors Red, yellow, green purple, light-blue, blue, white
5.9. Memory Capacity Track/mark: 8000 points, Waypoint: 999 points
5.10. Storage Capacity Simple route: 200 routes with 35 waypoints each
5.11. MOB 1 point
5.12. Quick Routes 1 course with 35 waypoints max.
5.13. Electronic Chart FURUNO chart card or NAVIONICS chart card available
C-MAP chart card also available for C-MAP NT Model
5.14. Alarms Arrival and Anchor watch, Cross track error and proximity
alarms,
Ship’s speed in and out alarms, Water temperature, Trip alarm,
Bottom alarm, Fish alarm (ETR required)
6. POWER SUPPLY
6.1. Rated Voltage/Current
M1722 12-24 VDC: 3.8-1.9 A
M1732 12-24 VDC: 3.8-1.9 A
M1742 12-24 VDC: 4.6-2.3 A
M1762 12-24 VDC: 5.4-2.7 A
M1722C 12-24 VDC: 4.0-2.0 A
M1732C 12-24 VDC: 4.0-2.0 A
M1742C 12-24 VDC: 5.0-2.5 A
M1762C 12-24 VDC: 6.0-3.0 A
6.2. Rectifier (PR-62: option) 100/110/115/200/220/230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz
7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION
7.1. Ambient Temperature Scanner Unit: -25°C to +70°C
(IEC 60945) Display Unit: -15°C to +55°C
7.2. Relative Humidity 93 % or less at +40°C
7.3. Waterproofing Scanner Unit: IPX6
(IEC 60529) Display Unit: IPX5
7.4. Bearing Vibration IEC 60945
8. COATING COLOR
8.1. Display Unit N3.0
8.2. Scanner Unit
SP - 5 E3494S01F
M1722/1732 (C) N9.5 (upper), 2.5PB3.5/10 (lower)
M1742/1762 (C) N9.5
9. COMPASS SAFE DISTANCE
9.1. Display Unit
M1722/1732/1742/1762 Standard: 0.70 m Steering: 0.50 m
M1722C/1732C/1741C/1762C
Standard: 0.65 m Steering: 0.45 m
9.2. Scanner Unit
M1722/C Standard: 1.25 m Steering: 0.85 m
M1732/C Standard: 1.40 m Steering: 1.10 m
M1742/C Standard: 2.10 m Steering: 1.60 m
M1762/C Standard: 1.00 m Steering: 0.75 m
IN-1
INDEX
A
A/C RAIN .......................................................2-5
A/C SEA..........................................................2-4
ACQ soft key ................................................2-35
ALARM key
radar.........................................................2-30
sounder.....................................................4-19
Alarms
anchor watch............................................3-55
arrival.......................................................3-54
audio.........................................................3-53
bottom ......................................................4-20
CPA/TCPA................................................2-42
fish............................................................4-20
fish(B/L) ...................................................4-21
guard ........................................................2-30
heading data missing ................................2-9
lost target.................................................2-43
messages ..................................................3-60
messages (sounder) .................................4-24
proximity..................................................3-57
speed.........................................................3-56
trip............................................................3-58
water temperature...................................4-22
XTE (cross track error)............................3-56
Anchor watch alarm ....................................3-55
Antenna height (GPS Receiver GP-310B)..5-25
ARP
acquisition of targets...............................2-36
activating .................................................2-35
ARP SETUP menu ..................................2-35
CPA/TCPA alarm .....................................2-42
data...........................................................2-41
deactivating .............................................2-35
lost target alarm......................................2-43
past position display................................2-40
test..............................................................7-9
tracking termination...............................2-38
vector........................................................2-39
Arrival alarm ...............................................3-54
A-scope display ..............................................4-7
Audio alarm .................................................3-53
Auto course-up mode.....................................3-8
AUTO S.SPD soft key .................................2-21
AUTO/D. BOX soft key .................................4-8
B
Battery replacement......................................7-2
Bearing measurement by EBL...................2-15
Bearing reference ..........................................5-2
Bottom alarm...............................................4-20
Bottom discrimination display .....................4-7
Bottom echo .................................................4-25
Bottom-lock display.......................................4-6
Bottom-zoom display.....................................4-5
Brilliance........................................................1-9
C
CENTER soft key ..........................................1-8
CHART DETAILS menu.............................5-13
CHART OFFSET soft key...........................5-12
Charts
C-MAP chart attributes..........................5-16
cursor and data display (C-MAP)...........3-14
data for aids to navigation......................3-12
FURUNO chart attributes......................5-15
icon data (C-MAP)...................................3-15
icons .........................................................3-10
indices ......................................................3-11
inserting.....................................................1-6
Nav-Charts
TM
chart attributes ..............5-15
offsetting..................................................5-12
port service icons.....................................3-13
symbols for FURUNO, NavCharts
TM
....3-12
tide information (C-MAP).......................3-16
CLEAR ALARM soft key.............................4-23
Clutter rejector............................................4-13
C-MAP charts
attributes .................................................5-16
cursor and data display ..........................3-14
icon data...................................................3-15
tide information.......................................3-16
CNTOUR LINE soft key .............................5-18
CNTOUR soft key........................................5-15
Cold start (GPS Receiver GP-310B)...........5-25
INDEX
IN-2
Colors (Color model)
echoes (radar)............................................5-5
Colors (MODEL1722C series)
echoes (sounder)......................................4-18
Compass display............................................3-3
Contrast.......................................................1-10
Controls
display unit................................................1-2
remote controller.......................................1-5
Course-up mode
plotter ........................................................3-8
radar ........................................................2-10
CPA/TCPA alarm.........................................2-42
Cursor
display format ...........................................5-4
shifting.......................................................1-8
CURSOR soft key........................................2-19
D
Data boxes
erasing .....................................................1-15
hiding.......................................................1-15
rearranging..............................................1-15
setup ........................................................5-20
showing....................................................1-15
Depth measurement ................................... 4-11
Depth source..................................................5-2
Depth unit......................................................5-2
Diagnostics
ARP test.....................................................7-9
display unit test ........................................7-8
GPS sensor test.........................................7-8
keyboard test........................................... 7-11
network sounder test................................7-9
test menu...................................................7-7
test pattern..............................................7-10
DISP key......................................................1-12
Display modes ............................................. 1-11
Display unit test............................................7-8
DISPLY MODE soft key ...............................4-2
Downloading data .........................................6-5
Dual frequency display.................................4-4
E
E. AVG soft key............................................2-28
E. STR soft key............................................2-27
EBL reference................................................5-4
EBL soft key ................................................2-15
EBL/VRM key ..................2-14, 2-15, 2-22, 2-23
Echo averaging............................................ 2-28
Echo offset (sounder) .................................. 5-30
Echo stretch................................................. 2-27
Echo trails
brilliance (MODEL1722 series) ............. 2-25
color (MODEL1722C series)................... 2-26
gradation (MODEL1722 series)............. 2-25
start ......................................................... 2-25
time.......................................................... 2-24
EDIT XT-LMT soft key................................. 3-5
ENTER knob................................................. 1-4
Error message ............................................. 7-14
Error messages ........................................... 7-14
ETA calculation........................................... 3-51
F
Fish alarm
sensitivity................................................ 5-29
setting...................................................... 4-20
Fish alarm (B/L)
sensitivity................................................ 5-29
Fish school echo .......................................... 4-26
Fish(B/L) alarm........................................... 4-21
Fix mode (GPS Receiver GP-310B)............ 5-25
Formatting memory cards............................ 6-1
FREQ 50/200 soft key................................... 4-3
FTC (Fast Time Constant) ........................... 2-6
Function keys
function execution................................... 1-16
setup (plotter).......................................... 5-10
setup (radar) ............................................. 5-7
setup (sounder) ....................................... 5-33
Fuse replacement.......................................... 7-2
G
GAIN key
radar.......................................................... 2-3
sounder.................................................... 4-10
GENERAL SETUP menu.............................5-1
Geodetic datum (GPS Receiver GP-310B). 5-24
Geodetic datum codes................................. 4-12
GPS Receiver GP-310B setup .................... 5-24
GPS sensor (GP-310B) test .......................... 7-8
GPS SETUP menu...................................... 5-24
GPS status display...................................... 7-12
INDEX
IN-3
Guard alarm
cancelling..................................................2-31
setting ......................................................2-30
H
Heading line ................................................2-17
Head-up mode..............................................2-10
Highway display............................................3-5
HL OFF soft key..........................................2-17
Hot page setup.............................................5-21
Hue (color)
plotter, radar ...........................................1-10
Hue (MODEL1722C series)
sounder ....................................................4-18
I
I. REJ. soft key ............................................2-18
Icons ............................................................ A-14
Interference rejection
radar ........................................................2-18
sounder ....................................................4-12
K
Keyboard test...............................................7-11
Keying pulse ................................................5-30
L
Language .......................................................5-2
Latitude, longitude display...........................5-2
Lines
erasing all................................................3-28
erasing by area........................................3-27
erasing individual ...................................3-27
type...........................................................3-26
LOAD DATA menu........................................6-4
Local time ....................................................5-23
Lost target alarm ........................................2-43
M
Magnetic variation ........................................5-2
Maintenance
battery replacement..................................7-2
fuse replacement.......................................7-2
preventive..................................................7-1
Marker-zoom display.....................................4-5
Marks
color..........................................................3-25
entering....................................................3-25
erasing all................................................3-28
erasing by area........................................3-27
erasing individual...................................3-27
shape........................................................3-25
Memory
clearing.................................................... 7-13
testing........................................................7-7
Memory cards
error messages ..........................................6-3
formatting..................................................6-1
playing back ..............................................6-4
saving data to............................................6-2
Memory I/O test ............................................7-7
Menu tree ......................................................A-1
Messages
memory cards............................................6-3
plotter alarms..........................................3-60
sounder alarms .......................................4-24
MOB mark...................................................3-61
Multiple echoes (radar)...............................2-46
N
Nav data display ...........................................3-6
NAV DATA menu.........................................5-28
Nav data source...........................................5-23
Nav data window ..........................................3-2
NAV OPTION menu....................................5-23
Navigation
canceling route navigation .....................3-52
port, port services ...................................3-47
quick point...............................................3-45
restarting.................................................3-50
routes.......................................................3-49
switching waypoints in a route..............3-51
waypoints ................................................3-46
Navigator setup..................................5-23, 5-24
NAVnet
image source............................................1-14
receiving data from...................................6-9
Network sounder test ...................................7-9
NEXT INFO soft key..........................3-59, 4-23
Noise limiter (sounder)...............................4-12
Noise rejection (radar)................................ 2-17
North marker ..............................................2-17
North-up mode
plotter ........................................................3-7
radar ........................................................ 2-11
INDEX
IN-4
O
Offset EBL...................................................2-22
OFFSET soft key................................2-22, 2-23
P
Picture advance speed ................................4-16
PLOTTER SETUP menu..............................5-9
PLOTTR CNTL soft key .............................1-13
Port, port services
icons .........................................................3-13
navigating to ...........................................3-47
Position offset (GPS Receiver GP-310B)....5-25
Position smoothing (GPS Receiver GP-310B)
..................................................................5-25
POWER/BRILL key ...............................1-7, 1-9
Presentation mode
plotter ........................................................3-7
radar ..........................................................2-9
Proximity alarm ..........................................3-57
Pulselength (radar) .......................................2-8
R
Racon............................................................2-50
RADAR CNTL soft key ...............................1-13
RADAR SETTING menu (radar) .................5-3
RADAR TX/ST-BY soft key ..........................2-2
Range
measurement by cursor (radar) .............2-13
measurement by range rings (radar).....2-12
measurement by VRM (radar) ...............2-14
plotter ........................................................3-9
radar ..........................................................2-7
setup (radar)..............................................5-6
setup (sounder)........................................5-32
unit of measurement.................................5-2
RANGE key
plotter ........................................................3-9
radar ..........................................................2-7
sounder ......................................................4-9
RESET XTE soft key.....................................3-5
RINGS soft key............................................2-12
Routes
cancelling navigation of..........................3-52
connecting................................................3-41
entering with cursor ...............................3-38
entering with existing waypoints...........3-37
erasing .....................................................3-44
following .................................................. 3-49
inserting waypoint from plotter display 3-43
inserting waypoint from route list......... 3-42
removing waypoint from ........................ 3-44
switching waypoints in route
navigation ........................................... 3-51
voyage based ........................................... 3-39
S
SART............................................................ 2-48
Satellite disable (GPS Receiver GP-310B) 5-25
SAVE DATA menu ........................................ 6-1
SAVE/MOB key........................................... 3-61
Sensor setup................................................ 5-30
SENSOR SETUP menu..............................5-31
SENSOR SETUP soft key .......................... 5-30
Shadow sectors............................................ 2-47
SHIFT soft key...................................2-20, 4-10
Sidelobe echoes............................................ 2-46
Signal level erasure (sounder) ................... 4-14
SIM SETUP menu ...................................... 1-17
Simulation display...................................... 1-17
Smoothing echoes (sounder)....................... 5-30
Speed alarm ................................................ 3-56
Speed averaging
GPS Receiver GP-310B .......................... 5-25
navigator (GPS, Loran C)....................... 5-23
Speed display ................................................ 5-2
Speed/course smoothing (GPS Receiver
GP-310B)................................................. 5-25
SPLIT soft key............................................... 4-7
System configuration........................................x
SYSTEM SETUP menu (sounder)............. 5-29
T
TARGET soft key ........................................ 2-24
TD display ..................................................... 5-2
TD setup
Decca........................................................ 5-27
Loran C.................................................... 5-26
TD SETUP menu ........................................ 5-26
Test menu...................................................... 7-7
Test pattern................................................. 7-10
Time notation................................................ 5-2
TIME soft key.............................................. 2-24
TLL data output (radar)............................. 2-29
TLL OUTPUT key ...................................... 2-29
Track
INDEX
IN-5
color..........................................................3-20
displaying other targets'.........................3-19
displaying own ship's..............................3-18
erasing all own ship's..............................3-24
erasing all targets' ..................................3-24
erasing own ship's by area......................3-23
erasing own ship's by color.....................3-24
memory distribution setting...................3-22
plotting interval ......................................3-21
plotting method .......................................3-21
plotting of own ship's ..............................3-19
TRACK HALT soft key................................3-19
TRACK RESUME soft key .........................3-19
Trackball
operation....................................................1-8
TRAIL COLOR soft key ..............................2-26
TRAIL ON/OFF soft key.............................2-25
TRAIL soft key ......................... 2-24, 2-25, 2-26
Trip alarm....................................................3-58
Trip distance resetting................................3-60
Troubleshooting.............................................7-3
plotter.........................................................7-5
radar ..........................................................7-3
sounder ......................................................7-6
Tuning............................................................2-2
TVG..............................................................5-30
Tx sector (radar)............................................5-4
U
Uploading data..............................................6-5
V
Vector (ARP) ................................................2-39
Virtual image...............................................2-47
VRM (Variable Range Marker)
radar ........................................................2-14
sounder ....................................................4-11
VRM soft key ......................................2-15, 2-16
W
Watchman.................................................... 2-32
Water temperature alarm...........................4-22
Water temperature graph...........................4-24
Water temperature unit................................5-2
Waypoint marker (radar)............................2-33
Waypoints
changing size...........................................3-35
color..........................................................3-30
editing from waypoint list......................3-32
editing waypoint position .......................3-33
editing with cursor..................................3-33
entering by range and bearing...............3-31
entering with cursor ...............................3-29
erasing from waypoint list .....................3-34
erasing with cursor.................................3-34
loading from Yeoman ................................6-8
navigating to ...........................................3-46
searching .................................................3-36
shape........................................................3-30
switching in route navigation ................3-51
White marker ..............................................4-15
World time chart .........................................A-13
WPT MK soft key........................................2-33
X
XTE (cross track error) alarm....................3-56
XTE monitor...........................................3-4, 3-5
Y
Yeoman...........................................................6-8
Z
Zero line.......................................................4-25
Zoom............................................................. 2-19
ZOOM/D.BOX soft key................................2-19
3 …


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Furuno 1732C at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Furuno 1732C in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 3,36 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info